You are on page 1of 502

Self-Service

Systems
ProCash 2000

Service Manual
Criticism, suggestions and corrections

We are interested in hearing your


comments on this manual. Any feedback
you give us helps us improve our
documentation and adapt it to your
wishes and needs.
For your comments you will find a fax
form in the back of this manual.
Thank you for your assistance.

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


ProCash 2000

Service Manual

Edition August 2000


Copyright © Information and trademarks

© Wincor Nixdorf GmbH & Co. KG 2000

All rights, including rights of translation


and rights of reproduction by reprinting,
copying or similar methods, even of parts,
are reserved.
Any violations give rise to a claim for
damages

All rights, including rights created by patent


grants or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved. Delivery subject to
availability; right of technical modifications
reserved.

All names of hardware and software


products mentioned in this manual are
trade names and/or trademarks of their
respective manufactures.

This manual was


produced using paper
treated with chlorine-free
bleach

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


C Contents..…………....………...….............

1 Introduction.............................................
(Safety precautions, descriptions, technical data)

2 Function and Integration........................

3 Basic Components.................................
(Power supply unit, power distributor, special electronics)

4 PCs and PC Cards .................................

5 Card Readers and Keyboards................

6 Monitors...................................................

7 Printer and Scanner................................

8 Cash-out Module / Deposit Unit.............

9 Multimedia...............................................
(Video equipment, telephone)

10 Miscellaneous.........................................

11 Removal / Installation of Components..


12 Maintenance and Service.......................

I Index.........................................................

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 0-1


0-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A
Contents

Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-1


Symbols used in this manual.......................................................................... 1-1
Important safety precautions .......................................................................... 1-2
General power interrupt.................................................................................. 1-4
Description of the device ................................................................................ 1-5
Function and use ..................................................................................... 1-5
Structure of the manual .................................................................................. 1-5
Outline ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Supplementary documentation................................................................ 1-6
Manual release ........................................................................................ 1-6
Technical data ................................................................................................ 1-7
Electrical characteristics of the supply network ....................................... 1-7
Device conditions .................................................................................... 1-7
Installation conditions .............................................................................. 1-8
Ambient conditions in accordance with DIN EN 60721 (IEC 721)........... 1-9
Mechanical conditions according to DIN IEC 721 ................................... 1-9
Noise emission in accordance with DIN EN 27779 ............................... 1-10
Compliance with standards and certifications ....................................... 1-11

Function and Integration ............................................................................. 2-1


Block diagrams............................................................................................... 2-1
System wiring diagram ............................................................................ 2-2
Cash-out module ..................................................................................... 2-3
Portrait camera ........................................................................................ 2-3
Audio Standard........................................................................................ 2-3
Powersave feature................................................................................... 2-4
Power supply.................................................................................................. 2-5
Mains voltage .......................................................................................... 2-5
Direct voltage supply ............................................................................... 2-5
Special electronics ......................................................................................... 2-7
Functions used ........................................................................................ 2-7
Signal assignment of user guidance........................................................ 2-7
Sound system Audio Standard....................................................................... 2-8
CCTV monitoring............................................................................................ 2-8
SOP button..................................................................................................... 2-8

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-1


Contents

System unit (PC) ............................................................................................ 2-9


Overview ................................................................................................. 2-9
LPT assignment ...................................................................................... 2-9
COM assignment................................................................................... 2-10
SCENIC PC system settings ................................................................. 2-11
Overview of PC cards............................................................................ 2-13
Monitors ....................................................................................................... 2-14
Operating the flat displays............................................................................ 2-15
Microswitch and jumper positions ......................................................... 2-15
Setting the graphics card....................................................................... 2-16
Setting the interface card ...................................................................... 2-17
PL adapter settings ............................................................................... 2-17
Printers......................................................................................................... 2-18
Card reader ID18 ......................................................................................... 2-18
Card reader ID24 ......................................................................................... 2-18
Keyboards and keypads............................................................................... 2-19
Uninterruptible power supply unit (UPS) ...................................................... 2-19

Power Supply Unit 00323501000 ................................................................ 3-1


Description ..................................................................................................... 3-1
Operating state indicator ......................................................................... 3-1
Power failure ........................................................................................... 3-1
Technical data................................................................................................ 3-2
Pin assignment........................................................................................ 3-2
Input voltages .......................................................................................... 3-4
Output voltages ....................................................................................... 3-4
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................... 3-4

Power Distributor 0323900000 .................................................................... 3-5

Special Electronics Module III 01750003214.............................................. 3-7


Controls and indicators .................................................................................. 3-7
Mode of operation .......................................................................................... 3-7
Switch-on characteristics ............................................................................... 3-8
Controlling the power supply.......................................................................... 3-8
UPS mode...................................................................................................... 3-9
System environment diagram ...................................................................... 3-10
Views of the special electronics ................................................................... 3-11

C-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Pin assignment............................................................................................. 3-12


Power source, power supply unit control............................................... 3-12
Power distributor.................................................................................... 3-12
Internal inputs/outputs I ......................................................................... 3-13
Customer-specific inputs/outputs .......................................................... 3-14
V.24 control of the SE............................................................................ 3-15
Softkeys on the left ................................................................................ 3-15
Softkeys on the right.............................................................................. 3-15
Control of operator prompts (illuminated arrows) ................................. 3-16
PIN keyboard matrix .............................................................................. 3-17
2 externally accessible jumpers............................................................. 3-17
Internal inputs/outputs II ........................................................................ 3-18

SCENIC 6XX PCs .......................................................................................... 4-1


Overview of PC variants................................................................................. 4-1
Supplied software........................................................................................... 4-1
Technical data ................................................................................................ 4-2
SCENIC 651 PII/400 IDE CD-R64 MB .................................................... 4-2
SCENIC 651 PII/400 SCSI CD-R64 MB.................................................. 4-4
SCENIC 661 PIII/450 IDE CD-R64 MB ................................................... 4-6
SCENIC 661 PIII/550 IDE CD-R64 MB ................................................... 4-8
ATX system board D1107 ............................................................................ 4-10
Resource table ............................................................................................. 4-12
PCI bus interrupts......................................................................................... 4-13
Settings with switches .................................................................................. 4-14
Switch 1: ................................................................................................ 4-15
Switch 2: Recover system BIOS............................................................ 4-15
Switch 3: Write protection for floppy drive ............................................. 4-15
Switch 4: ................................................................................................ 4-15
Switches 5 to 8: Setting the clock frequency......................................... 4-16
Pentium II with 66 MHz Front Side Bus:................................................ 4-16
Celeron with 66 MHz Front Side Bus: ................................................... 4-17
Pentium II with 100 MHz Front Side Bus:.............................................. 4-17
Pentium III with 100 MHz Front Side Bus:............................................. 4-17
Extensions.................................................................................................... 4-18
Exchanging the processor............................................................................ 4-20
Inserting the processor.......................................................................... 4-21
Removing the processor........................................................................ 4-21
Upgrading main memory .............................................................................. 4-22
Inserting the memory module ................................................................ 4-23
Removing the memory module.............................................................. 4-23
Exchanging the lithium battery ..................................................................... 4-24

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-3


Contents

CMOS-SETUP ............................................................................................. 4-25


Bios version: V4.06 R 1.04.1107........................................................... 4-25
Main....................................................................................................... 4-25
Main > Hard Disk 1................................................................................ 4-25
Main > Boot Options.............................................................................. 4-26
Advanced .............................................................................................. 4-26
Advanced > Cache Memory.................................................................. 4-27
Advanced > Peripheral Configuration ................................................... 4-27
Advanced > PCI Configuration.............................................................. 4-28
Advanced > Advanced System Configuration....................................... 4-28
Advanced > Power On/Off .................................................................... 4-29
Advanced > System Management ........................................................ 4-29
Security ................................................................................................. 4-30
Power .................................................................................................... 4-30
Exit ........................................................................................................ 4-31

V.24 PCI Multiport Card ............................................................................. 4-33

EICON C21 (01750011987)......................................................................... 4-35


Item numbers incl. SW ................................................................................. 4-35
Card accessories ......................................................................................... 4-37
Required hardware resources...................................................................... 4-38
Overview of possible I/O addresses............................................................. 4-38
Interrupt setting ............................................................................................ 4-39
Installation .................................................................................................... 4-40
OSI gateway for DOS............................................................................ 4-40
OS/2, OSI or SNA Gateway .................................................................. 4-42
Windows NT 4.0: Connection for Windows NT V4R2 ........................... 4-44
Automatic installation ............................................................................ 4-45
Manual installation................................................................................. 4-47
Configuration of the WAN Services....................................................... 4-50
Testing the card with ECTEST..................................................................... 4-53
Technical data.............................................................................................. 4-54
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 4-55
Appendix ...................................................................................................... 4-56
Example for DOS .................................................................................. 4-56
Example: OSI Gateway (depending on the above directory entry) ....... 4-56
Examples for OS/2 ................................................................................ 4-56

Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715............................................. 4-61


Hardware settings ........................................................................................ 4-62
Factory defaults..................................................................................... 4-62

C-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Overview of possible settings....................................................................... 4-62


Configuration program.................................................................................. 4-63
Configuring the card ..................................................................................... 4-64
Command table ..................................................................................... 4-65
Software switches ........................................................................................ 4-66
SMARTLSP.EXE driver................................................................................ 4-68
Creating the SMARTLSP.EXE driver .................................................... 4-68

Ethernet 3C905B TX 01750019090 ............................................................ 4-71


Introduction................................................................................................... 4-71
DOS configuration program.......................................................................... 4-73
Adjustment of the card ................................................................................. 4-74

DU78-V Adapter 0175001284 ..................................................................... 4-75


Setting .......................................................................................................... 4-76
I/O address ............................................................................................ 4-76
DMA selection ....................................................................................... 4-77
Interrupt choice...................................................................................... 4-78
Default setting........................................................................................ 4-79
Interface ....................................................................................................... 4-80
Signal assignment universal DT interface ............................................. 4-80

DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516.................................................. 4-81


Setting .......................................................................................................... 4-81
I/O address ............................................................................................ 4-83
DMA selection ....................................................................................... 4-83
Interrupt choice...................................................................................... 4-84
Setting example..................................................................................... 4-85
Interface ....................................................................................................... 4-85
Signal assignment universal DT interface ............................................. 4-85

Audio Card TT SOLO 01750022769 .......................................................... 4-87


Technical data .............................................................................................. 4-87

Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP .............................................................. 4-89


Introduction................................................................................................... 4-89
Resources .................................................................................................... 4-89
DIP switches, connectors and jumpers ........................................................ 4-90
Description of connectors............................................................................. 4-91
Connector X8: External PanelLink......................................................... 4-91
Connector X9: Connection for analogue monitor .................................. 4-91
Connector X2: Connection for separate 12 V supply ............................ 4-91

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-5


Contents

Jumper settings............................................................................................ 4-92


JP4: BIOS access ................................................................................ 4-92
JP5: DISPON Polarity .......................................................................... 4-92
JP9: 12 V power supply........................................................................ 4-93
JP11 and JP12: Display CLK source .................................................. 4-93
JP19: 3.3 V Core voltage ..................................................................... 4-94
Potentiometer R117 ..................................................................................... 4-94
Adjusting the PanelLink signal peak...................................................... 4-94
Setting the DIP switches .............................................................................. 4-95
Fuse ............................................................................................................. 4-98
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 4-98
Connector X9 ........................................................................................ 4-98
Connector X2 ........................................................................................ 4-98
Connector X8 ........................................................................................ 4-99

Card Reader ID18 ......................................................................................... 5-1


Devices with hard-coded firmware ................................................................. 5-2
Devices with firmware download.................................................................... 5-3
Position of components.................................................................................. 5-5
Pin assignment............................................................................................... 5-6
RS232C Interface.................................................................................... 5-6
I/O Port .................................................................................................... 5-7
Power supply.................................................................................................. 5-8
Maintenance and service ............................................................................... 5-9
Cleaning and test utilities ........................................................................ 5-9
Test utilities ............................................................................................. 5-9
Cleaning utilities ...................................................................................... 5-9
Spare parts.............................................................................................. 5-9
Technical data.............................................................................................. 5-10

DIP Push-in Card Reader (ID24102114).................................................... 5-11


System connection....................................................................................... 5-12
Technical data.............................................................................................. 5-13

SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214) ............................................................ 5-15


Schematic diagram ...................................................................................... 5-16
System connection....................................................................................... 5-17
Technical data.............................................................................................. 5-18
Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 5-18

C-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

EPP (Krone) ................................................................................................ 5-19


Description ................................................................................................... 5-19
Maintenance operations ............................................................................... 5-20
Replacing the EPP in the event of an error ........................................... 5-20
Replacing the battery............................................................................. 5-20
Battery type ........................................................................................... 5-21
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 5-21
Pin assignment (9 pin M, D SUB).......................................................... 5-21

10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)............................................................... 6-1


Important safety precautions .......................................................................... 6-1
Module view and integration........................................................................... 6-2
Technical data LCD........................................................................................ 6-3
Mechanical and environmental conditions............................................... 6-3
Electrical properties (maximum values)................................................... 6-3
Electrical properties of background lighting............................................. 6-4
Pin assignment: Interface ........................................................................ 6-5
Pin assignment: Lamp connector ............................................................ 6-6
Inverter ........................................................................................................... 6-7
Technical data ......................................................................................... 6-7
Pin assignment: Input connector ............................................................. 6-8
Pin assignment: Lamp connector ............................................................ 6-8
Dotronic interface card ................................................................................... 6-9
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-10
Pin assignment: Inverter........................................................................ 6-10
Pin assignment: LC display ................................................................... 6-10
Pin assignment: Interface card .............................................................. 6-10
Removal/installation of background lighting ................................................. 6-11

10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)............................................................. 6-13


Important safety precautions ........................................................................ 6-13
Module view and integration......................................................................... 6-14
Technical data LCD...................................................................................... 6-15
Mechanical and environmental conditions............................................. 6-15
Electrical properties (maximum values)................................................. 6-15
Electrical properties of background lighting........................................... 6-16
Pin assignment: Interface ...................................................................... 6-17
Pin assignment: Lamp connector .......................................................... 6-18
Inverter ......................................................................................................... 6-19
Technical data ....................................................................................... 6-19
Pin assignment: Input connector ........................................................... 6-20
Pin assignment: Lamp connector .......................................................... 6-20

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-7


Contents

Dotronic interface card ................................................................................. 6-21


Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-22
Pin assignment: Inverter........................................................................ 6-22
Pin assignment: LC display ................................................................... 6-22
Pin assignment: Interface card.............................................................. 6-22
Removal/installation of background lighting................................................. 6-23

12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) ............................................................ 6-25


Important safety precautions........................................................................ 6-25
Module view and integration ........................................................................ 6-26
Technical data.............................................................................................. 6-27
General.................................................................................................. 6-27
LCD ....................................................................................................... 6-28
Pin assignment: Interface...................................................................... 6-29
Background lighting............................................................................... 6-30
Inverter .................................................................................................. 6-31
Dotronic interface card ................................................................................. 6-32
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-33
Removal/installation of background lighting................................................. 6-34

Dotcard-LVPL ............................................................................................. 6-37


Introduction .................................................................................................. 6-37
Placing DIP switches, connectors and jumpers ........................................... 6-38
Description of the connectors....................................................................... 6-39
Connector X4: Connection between graphics card and receiver .......... 6-39
Connector X2 and X5: Link for flat display ............................................ 6-39
Connector X7: External connection for backlight ON / OFF.................. 6-39
Jumper setting.............................................................................................. 6-40
JP1: Display voltage.............................................................................. 6-40
JP5: “DISPON” Signal level................................................................... 6-40
JP6: “DISPON” source .......................................................................... 6-41
Setting DIP switch S1............................................................................ 6-42
Fuse ............................................................................................................. 6-43
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-44
Connector X4 ........................................................................................ 6-44
Connector X2 ........................................................................................ 6-45
Connector X5 ........................................................................................ 6-46
Connector X7 ........................................................................................ 6-46

15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) ............................................................... 6-47


Important safety precautions........................................................................ 6-47
Module view and integration ........................................................................ 6-48

C-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Technical data .............................................................................................. 6-49


General.................................................................................................. 6-49
LCD ....................................................................................................... 6-50
Interface - Pin assignment..................................................................... 6-51
Background lighting ............................................................................... 6-52
Inverter .................................................................................................. 6-53
Dotronic interface card ................................................................................. 6-54
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-56
Removal/installation of background lighting ................................................. 6-57

Dotcard-PL Adapter ................................................................................... 6-61


Introduction................................................................................................... 6-61
Position of connectors and jumpers ............................................................. 6-62
Description of the connectors....................................................................... 6-63
Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics card
and adapter ................................................................... 6-63
Connector X2: Connection for flat display ............................................. 6-63
Connector X7: External connection for backlight ON / OFF .................. 6-63
Jumper setting.............................................................................................. 6-64
JP1: Display voltage .............................................................................. 6-64
JP5: “DISPON” Signal level................................................................... 6-64
Potentiometer R150 ..................................................................................... 6-65
Fuse....................................................................................................... 6-65
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 6-66
Connector X4......................................................................................... 6-66
Connector X2......................................................................................... 6-67
Connector X7......................................................................................... 6-68

Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690 ............................................................ 6-69


Components ................................................................................................. 6-69
Operation...................................................................................................... 6-71
LED display .................................................................................................. 6-72
Technical data .............................................................................................. 6-73
Touchscreen.......................................................................................... 6-73
Pin assignment of touch controller cable (9-pin D-SUB F) ................... 6-74

Journal Printer ND98.................................................................................... 7-1


Structure......................................................................................................... 7-1
Interfaces........................................................................................................ 7-1
Serial interface connectors ...................................................................... 7-1

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-9


Contents

Functions........................................................................................................ 7-2
Initialising the printer ............................................................................... 7-2
Indicators................................................................................................. 7-2
Status indicator........................................................................................ 7-3
Paper handling ............................................................................................... 7-3
Loading paper ......................................................................................... 7-3
Removing the paper ................................................................................ 7-3
Error handling................................................................................................. 7-4
Error indication ........................................................................................ 7-4
Offline status ........................................................................................... 7-4
Command monitoring .............................................................................. 7-4
Paper-low message................................................................................. 7-5
End-of-paper message............................................................................ 7-5
Hardware........................................................................................................ 7-6
Controller................................................................................................. 7-6
Functions................................................................................................. 7-6
Test programs ................................................................................................ 7-7
Controls ................................................................................................... 7-7
Internal test procedure ............................................................................ 7-7
Test levels ...................................................................................................... 7-8
Test level 1 (paper sensor test)............................................................... 7-8
Test level 2 (carrier sensor test).............................................................. 7-8
Test level 3 (carrier test).......................................................................... 7-8
Test level 4 (printer test).......................................................................... 7-9
If an error occurs ..................................................................................... 7-9
Technical data.............................................................................................. 7-10
Service life of printing unit ..................................................................... 7-10
Room classification ............................................................................... 7-10
Printing unit ........................................................................................... 7-10
Ribbon cartridge .................................................................................... 7-11
Paper feed unit ...................................................................................... 7-11
Print functions........................................................................................ 7-11
Paper specifications .............................................................................. 7-12
Dimensions and weights ....................................................................... 7-12
Electrical data........................................................................................ 7-12
Interface to the host............................................................................... 7-13

Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E .................................................................... 7-15


Connection of the printer.............................................................................. 7-16
Power supply......................................................................................... 7-16
Data interface ........................................................................................ 7-16
Block diagram ND9C............................................................................. 7-17

C-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Block diagram ND9E ............................................................................. 7-17


Views of thermal printer ND9C..................................................................... 7-18
Overall view ........................................................................................... 7-18
Individual modules................................................................................. 7-19
Views of needle printer ND9E ...................................................................... 7-23
Overall view ........................................................................................... 7-23
Individual modules................................................................................. 7-24
Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9C).............................................. 7-27
Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9E).............................................. 7-28
Paper path monitoring ........................................................................... 7-29
Status indicators........................................................................................... 7-30
Meaning of LEDs ................................................................................... 7-30
Indicators when online........................................................................... 7-30
Indicators in case of malfunction ........................................................... 7-31
Indicators in test mode .......................................................................... 7-31
Key functions at power up ............................................................................ 7-32
Key functions in normal operation ................................................................ 7-33
Internal test – key functions.......................................................................... 7-34
Internal test................................................................................................... 7-35
Displaying the test level................................................................................ 7-36
Binary displaying test level .................................................................... 7-36
Description of the test programs .................................................................. 7-37
Test level 1 (Paper sensor 1) ................................................................ 7-37
Test level 2 (Paper sensor 2) ................................................................ 7-37
Test 3 (Test carrier-sensors) (only ND9E)............................................. 7-38
Test 4 (Test carrier) (only ND9E) .......................................................... 7-38
Test level 5 (Cutter/Presenter) .............................................................. 7-39
Test level 6 (Print test)........................................................................... 7-39
Test level 7 (Mark control) ..................................................................... 7-40
Paper controlling .......................................................................................... 7-41
Procedure of Paper controlling .............................................................. 7-41
Mark detection ....................................................................................... 7-42
Reset when switching on.............................................................................. 7-43
Reset when switching on without mark control ..................................... 7-43
Reset when switching on with mark control .......................................... 7-43
Reset when feeding in ........................................................................... 7-44
Reset at feed-in without mark control .................................................... 7-44
Reset at feed-in with mark control ......................................................... 7-45
Formfeed ...................................................................................................... 7-46
Formfeed without mark control .............................................................. 7-46
Formfeed with mark control ................................................................... 7-46

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-11


Contents

Mark control ................................................................................................. 7-47


Switching on the mark control ............................................................... 7-47
Disabling the mark control..................................................................... 7-48
Enabling the mark control when switching on ....................................... 7-48
Eject ............................................................................................................. 7-49
Paper out...................................................................................................... 7-49
Physical paper out................................................................................. 7-49
Paper out during printing ....................................................................... 7-50
Paper out detection ............................................................................... 7-50
Paper low detection............................................................................... 7-50
Mark errors................................................................................................... 7-51
Error handling............................................................................................... 7-51
Pin assignment............................................................................................. 7-52
Data connector ...................................................................................... 7-52
24 V connector ...................................................................................... 7-53
Technical data.............................................................................................. 7-54
Power supply......................................................................................... 7-54
Power input (ND9C) .............................................................................. 7-54
Power input (ND9E) .............................................................................. 7-54
Service life............................................................................................. 7-55
Paper specification....................................................................................... 7-55
Mark detection.............................................................................................. 7-56
Mark position (ND9C)............................................................................ 7-57
Mark position (ND9E) ............................................................................ 7-58
Ribbon cartridge (only ND9E) ...................................................................... 7-59

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 ................................................................ 8-1


Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-1
Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out module.................................................. 8-2
Rearload.................................................................................................. 8-4
Frontload ................................................................................................. 8-5
Central cash-out controller (ZAC) .................................................................. 8-6
Assignment of ZAC ................................................................................. 8-6
Function principle ......................................................................................... 8-11
Mode of operation of cash-out module SAT 2X00 and new MDMS II... 8-11
Main features of cash-out module SAT 2X00........................................ 8-21
Functions of the various modules of cash-out module-SAT 2X00 ........ 8-24
Overview of sensors and electromechanical components .................... 8-28
Explanation of abbreviations ................................................................. 8-29

C-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Description of cash path (Frontload) ............................................................ 8-31


Cash-out ................................................................................................ 8-31
Bundle retract when notes are not removed.......................................... 8-33
Bundle reject.......................................................................................... 8-35
Bundle reject from wait position............................................................. 8-37
Error codes................................................................................................... 8-38
Start-up phase.............................................................................................. 8-39
Normal mode................................................................................................ 8-41

Camera 01750010360 ................................................................................... 9-1


Technical data ................................................................................................ 9-2
Pin assignment............................................................................................... 9-2

Customer Connector Panel 3338700112 .................................................. 10-1


Description ................................................................................................... 10-1
Technical data .............................................................................................. 10-3
Circuit diagram ...................................................................................... 10-3
Pin assignment ...................................................................................... 10-4

Operator Panel 01750018100..................................................................... 10-5


Mechanical construction............................................................................... 10-6
Labelling of keys and indicators ................................................................... 10-7
Switching on ................................................................................................. 10-9
Operation.................................................................................................... 10-10
Simulating the key-operated switch function ....................................... 10-10
Display lighting ........................................................................................... 10-11
Setup .......................................................................................................... 10-12
Setup program start mask ................................................................... 10-12
Setting the operator panel type ........................................................... 10-13
Setting the national language .............................................................. 10-13
Setting the interface parameters ......................................................... 10-14
Setting the display contrast ................................................................. 10-15
Calling the special functions ................................................................ 10-15
Special functions: keyboard test.......................................................... 10-16
Electronic test ...................................................................................... 10-17
Display test .......................................................................................... 10-17
Firmware version ................................................................................. 10-18
Maintenance............................................................................................... 10-19
Technical data ............................................................................................ 10-19
Pin assignment........................................................................................... 10-20

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-13


Contents

Smart UPS 700.......................................................................................... 10-21


Controls...................................................................................................... 10-21
Front side ............................................................................................ 10-21
Rear side ............................................................................................. 10-22
Switching on............................................................................................... 10-23
Switching off............................................................................................... 10-23
Self-test ...................................................................................................... 10-24
Indicators and warnings ............................................................................. 10-25
Error messages ................................................................................... 10-28
Data interface............................................................................................. 10-30
Pin assignment.................................................................................... 10-30
Technical data............................................................................................ 10-31
Safety precautions ..................................................................................... 10-32
Maintenance and installation...................................................................... 10-32
Special settings ................................................................................... 10-32
Meaning of the LED symbols .............................................................. 10-32
Voltage threshold ................................................................................ 10-33
Warning interval with low battery charge............................................. 10-34
Repairs and battery replacement ............................................................... 10-34

User Guidance.......................................................................................... 10-35


Control........................................................................................................ 10-35
4- / 6-digit user guidance............................................................................ 10-36
Pin assignment.................................................................................... 10-37

Powersave Print ....................................................................................... 10-39


Powersave Print without LED control......................................................... 10-39
Powersave Print with LED control.............................................................. 10-39
Views.......................................................................................................... 10-40
Powersave Print without LED control .................................................. 10-40
Powersave Print with LED control ....................................................... 10-41
Wiring plans ............................................................................................... 10-42
Powersave Print without LED control .................................................. 10-42
Powersave Print with LED control ....................................................... 10-43
Pin assignment........................................................................................... 10-44
X1: Signals from connector, internal in/outputs II from SE III.............. 10-44
X2: 24 V input from power supply unit................................................. 10-45
X3: Switched 24 V output for consumers ............................................ 10-45
X4: Connector for fan control and SE III /
power distributor connection ........................................................ 10-45
X5: Connector for fan control and SE III /
power distributor connection ........................................................ 10-46

C-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

X6: Output for power sources 9-12 and fans....................................... 10-47


X7: Output for power sources 13-16 and fans..................................... 10-48

Removal/Installation of Components RL ................................................. 11-1


Device views ................................................................................................ 11-1
Front view .............................................................................................. 11-1
Rear view............................................................................................... 11-2
Device door opened .............................................................................. 11-3
Safe door opened .................................................................................. 11-4
Opening the ProCash 2000.......................................................................... 11-5
Opening / closing the device door ......................................................... 11-5
Opening / closing the customer panel ................................................... 11-5
Pulling out the printer carriage............................................................... 11-6
Pulling out the pull-out unit .................................................................... 11-6
Pulling out the cash-out module ............................................................ 11-7
AZM output transport.................................................................................... 11-8
Operator panel ............................................................................................. 11-8
Special electronics ..................................................................................... 11-10
Powersave Print ......................................................................................... 11-10
Power distributor ........................................................................................ 11-11
Power supply unit ....................................................................................... 11-11
Capacitor (only ID18) ................................................................................. 11-12
Journal printer ND98 .................................................................................. 11-13
Receipt printer ND9C ................................................................................. 11-14
ID18............................................................................................................ 11-15
DIP push-in card reader reader.................................................................. 11-16
SWIPE card reader .................................................................................... 11-18
Customer connector panel ......................................................................... 11-18
MM converter ............................................................................................. 11-19
PC .............................................................................................................. 11-19
User guidance LEDs .................................................................................. 11-20
10,4’’ LCD monitor without Touchscreen ................................................... 11-20
Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD............................................................... 11-21
15’’ LCD monitor......................................................................................... 11-25
Touch pane for 15’’ LCD monitor ............................................................... 11-27
Keyboard .................................................................................................... 11-29
PIN keyboard....................................................................................... 11-29
EPP keyboard...................................................................................... 11-29
Loudspeaker............................................................................................... 11-30

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-15


Contents

Removal/Installation of Components FL ............................................... 11-31


Device views .............................................................................................. 11-31
Front view............................................................................................ 11-31
Customer panel opened ...................................................................... 11-32
Safe door opened................................................................................ 11-33
Opening the ProCash 2000 FL .................................................................. 11-34
Opening / closing the device door ....................................................... 11-34
Opening /closing the customer panel .................................................. 11-34
Pulling out the printer carriage ............................................................ 11-35
Pulling out the pull-out unit .................................................................. 11-35
Pulling out the AZM cash-out module ................................................. 11-36
AZM output transport ................................................................................. 11-37
Operator panel ........................................................................................... 11-37
Special electronics ..................................................................................... 11-39
Powersave Print ......................................................................................... 11-39
Power distributor ........................................................................................ 11-40
Power supply unit....................................................................................... 11-40
Capacitor (only ID18) ................................................................................. 11-41
Journal printer ND98 .................................................................................. 11-42
Receipt printer ND9C ................................................................................. 11-43
ID18............................................................................................................ 11-43
DIP push-in card reader ............................................................................. 11-44
SWIPE card reader .................................................................................... 11-46
Customer connector panel ......................................................................... 11-46
MM converter ............................................................................................. 11-47
EDM module .............................................................................................. 11-47
PC .............................................................................................................. 11-48
User guidance LEDs .................................................................................. 11-48
10,4" LCD monitor without Touchscreen ................................................... 11-49
Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD .................................................................... 11-50
15" LCD monitor......................................................................................... 11-54
Touch pane for 15“ LCD monitor................................................................ 11-55
Keyboard.................................................................................................... 11-57
PIN keyboard....................................................................................... 11-57
EPP keyboard ..................................................................................... 11-57
Loudspeaker .............................................................................................. 11-58

C-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Contents

Maintenance and Service .......................................................................... 12-1


Test options.................................................................................................. 12-1
Preventive maintenance............................................................................... 12-2
Keyboard ............................................................................................... 12-2
LCD monitor .......................................................................................... 12-2
User guidance display ........................................................................... 12-2
UPS ....................................................................................................... 12-2
ID card readers (ID18, DIP, SWIPE) ..................................................... 12-3
Printers .................................................................................................. 12-3
Approved maintenance materials................................................................. 12-4

Index ............................................................................................................... I-1

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual C-17


Contents

C-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction
This service manual has been compiled for authorised service personnel only.
The operating and installation instructions should also be read since certain
details are only described in these instructions.

Symbols used in this manual


Text following a dash represents an item in a list.
"" Text in quotation marks refers to other chapters or sections in this
document.
• Text following this symbol describes actions to be performed in the
specified order.
Text following this symbol should be given special attention in order to
avoid damage and injury.

Text following this symbol contains general information to facilitate


i use of the device and help avoid operating errors.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-1


Important safety precautions Introduction

Important safety precautions


This device complies with the relevant safety regulations for information
processing equipment.
Please read the following notes carefully before doing any work on
the device.
− When moving the device from a cold to a warm environment, do not
operate it for at least two hours to prevent possible damage caused by
condensation.
− Only use the original packaging material to transport the device.
− Observe the warning and information labels on the device.
− The device is equipped with a safety-tested power cable which must be
connected only to a grounded outlet.
− Always hold the plug when removing the power cable. Never pull the cable
itself.
− Install cables in such a way that they will not be stepped on or tripped over
or damaged in any way.
− Make sure that there is always free access to the sockets used or to the
electrical circuit-breakers of the house installation.
− In case of an emergency (e. g. damaged cabinets, controls or power
cables, liquids or foreign objects in the device) observe the following
instructions:
• Switch off the device immediately.
• Pull the power plug.
• Inform the customer service office responsible for you.
Observe the notes in the section "General power interrupt".

− Connect any component later added to the device (e. g. a modem) to a


grounded socket with an approved power cable.
− Have damaged power cables replaced immediately.
− During a thunderstorm, data transmission lines may not be connected or
disconnected.
− Always keep the device’s ventilation slots free from obstruction to ensure
proper air circulation and to prevent malfunctions resulting from
overheating.

1-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction Important safety precautions

− Only use accessories and extension components which have been


approved by us. Nonobservance can result in damage to the system or
violations of regulations or certifications concerning safety, radio
interference and ergonomical requirements.
Note that there are only Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuits (SELV circuits) if
you want to feed voltage from an external source into prepared cables to install
additional electronics (e. g. EMA connection).
− To clean the device, only use the cleaning agents approved by us (see
chapter "Maintenance and Service").

Repair work
Repair work may only be carried out by authorised personnel.
Unauthorised opening of the device or repair work carried out
improperly could result in considerable danger to the user.
In case of noncompliance, Wincor Nixdorf GmbH & Co. KG excludes
all liability.

Lithium battery
Danger of explosion if replaced improperly.
Only use the same battery type or a type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Do not put the lithium battery into the household waste. It will be taken
back at no charge by the manufacturer, the dealer or their
representative for recycling or disposal.

Operating the device


Before operating the device, remove all parts inside of it which
i secure its components during transportation or check whether they
have been removed (see inclosed info sheet).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-3


General power interrupt Introduction

General power interrupt


A general power interrupt has the following effects:
− All current transactions are immediately aborted (exception:
transport of the ID card).
− Dispensed banknotes remain in the transport path of the cash-out
module. They will be transported to the collecting tray or the reject
cassette of the cash-out module after the device has been turned on
again.
− Depending on the parameter setting, ID cards are either output,
retained or transported to the ID card reject tray. This transaction will
be properly completed.

• Only frontload: Open the front door (see chapter "Basic Operation").
• Open the safe door (see chapter "Basic Operation").
• Disconnect the plug connection of the power cable.
• Devices with UPS (option): Turn the UPS off.
How to switch off the UPS depends on the UPS unit used.
For more details see chapter "Smart UPS 700".

• To ensure that the entire device is disconnected from power, you must also
pull the plug of the power cable from the wall outlet or interrupt the power
supply in the distributor box of the building by switching off the circuit-
breaker or by removing the fuse.

1-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction Description of the device

Description of the device

Function and use


The ProCash 2000 is a monofunctional automated teller machine for indoor
installation. It is based on a modular system which, apart from the basic
functions of the cash output and information display, can be extended with the
following functions:
Load and unload electronic purse data
Print receipts or other documents
Issue and/or print tickets or vouchers from multi-use cassettes.
The various functions are implemented by the use of components which can
be combined as needed. They are described in detail in the following chapters.

Structure of the manual

Outline
The chapter "Introduction" describes the important safety precautions and the
general power interruption. It also gives an overview of the possible functions
of the ProCash 2000.
The features are also described in the chapter "Introduction" in the section
"Technical Data".
In the chapter "Function and Integration" you will find the block diagrams and a
short description of the main functions of the device.
This is followed by the chapters describing the components which are used or
can be used.
The next chapter "Removal/Installation of Components" provides detailed
information on how to remove and install each component.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-5


Structure of the manual Introduction

Finally, the chapter "Maintenance" contains information on maintenance work


to be carried out regularly.

Supplementary documentation
For the operation and installation of the system, separate manuals are
available in several languages.
These manuals can be ordered from the publications office in Fürth, Germany.
They are also available in the Intranet.
Usually the manufacturers' original manuals for OEM components are included
in the shipment. They may contain more detailed information.

Manual release
Since production began, some components have been replaced for various
reasons (e. g. progress in technology, cost reduction).
Often the hardware replacement does not result in a changed construction of
the device (mechanical or electrical) or the functional integration.
In this case, the new component is added to the service manual and the
previous component remains in the respective chapter.
If the integration of a new component results in changes, the corresponding
chapters will be adapted (e. g. block diagrams, removal/installation, preventive
maintenance, etc.).

1-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction Technical data

Technical data

Electrical characteristics of the supply network

Line voltage: 110 - 120 V 220 - 240 V


Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Network type: TN (network with TN (network with PE
PE conductor) conductor)
Permissible tolerance for rated
voltage: - 10 % / + 6 % - 10 % / + 6 %
Permissible tolerance for rated
frequency: ±1% ±1%

Device conditions

General 110 - 120 V 220 – 240 V


Idle mode Maximum Idle Maximum
mode
Rated current consumption: 1.7 A 2.4 A 1.0 A 1.6 A
Apparent power consumption: 104 VA 281 VA 224 VA 352 VA
Real power: 170 W 260 W 180 W 330 W
Power factor: 0,84 0,93 0,78 0,91
Protection class: Ι Ι
Leakage current (maximum): 1.17 mA 2.14 mA
Power supply connection: Country-specific Country-specific
safety plug safety plug
Fuse: 10 A slow fuseor 16 A 10 A slow fuseor
automatic circuit- 16 A automatic
breaker circuit-breaker
Type of protection IP 20 IP 20
(DIN VDE 0470-1):

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-7


Technical data Introduction

Installation conditions
ProCash 2000 ProCash 2000
Rearload Frontload

Dimensions:
Height: 1472 mm 1472 mm
Width: 600 mm 600 mm
Depth: 900 mm 900 mm

Required floor space: 0.54 m² 0.54 m²

Operation and maintenance


space: 2.18 m² 1.15 m²

Weight:
CEN III safe
Device weight: 630 kg 630 kg
Surface load: 12.4 kN/m² 12.4 kN/m²
CEN IV safe
Device weight: 660 kg 660 kg
Surface load: 12.9 kN/m² 12.9 kN/m²
UL safe
Device weight: 480 kg 480 kg
Surface load: 9.4 kN/m² 9.4 kN/m²

1-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction Technical data

Ambient conditions in accordance with DIN EN 60721


(IEC 721)

Class Ambient Relative


temperature °C humidity % r.h.
Operation (Indoor) 3K2 + 15 to + 35** 10 to 75
Limit range of 3K3 + 5 to + 40 5 to 85
operation *
Transport 1K2 - 25 to + 60 15 to 98
Storage 1K2 + 5 to + 40 5 to 85

* The device may only operated for a short period of time in the limit range of
operation.
** Deviating from the standard, the ambient temperature has been changed to
+ +35 °C.

Mechanical conditions according to DIN IEC 721

Class Comment
Operation 3M2 Building with minimum external
vibration.
Transport 3M2 All types of commercial vehicles and
(in original packing) trailers as well as rail and air transport.
Storage 1M3 Noticeable vibration and shocks, e.g. by
(in original packing) machines or passing vehicles.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-9


Technical data Introduction

Noise emission in accordance with DIN EN 27779

Noise values acc. to ISO 9296 Idle Mode/Standby Operation*


Sound power level LWAd 5.0 B 6.7 B
Workplace-related sound pressure 32 dB 50 dB
level LpAm (at adjacent workplace)

* typical operating cycle.

1-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Introduction Technical data

Compliance with standards and certifications

Standards met
Security standards: IEC 950
DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805
CSA 22.2 No. 950
EMC standards: EN 55 022 / B
EN 50 082 – 1
EN 50 082 – 2

Conformity
The CE mark of conformity attached to the product or its package indicates
that the product complies with the requirements of the following EU
guideline(s):
EMC guideline 89/336/EEC including the amendment guideline 93/68/EEC
Low voltage guideline 73/23/EEC including the amendment guideline
93/68/EEC
The corresponding statement of compliance has been issued by
Wincor Nixdorf GmbH & Co. KG
Heinz-Nixdorf-Ring 1
33106 Paderborn

Notes concerning radio interference suppression and electrical safety


All other devices connected to this product must comply with the EMC
guideline 89/336/EEC including the amendment guideline 93/68/EEC and the
low voltage guideline 73/23/EEC including the amendment guideline
93/68/EEC.

Certification for data transmission


The certification number or CE mark of the data transmission module (if
present) is attached directly to the DT card or to the housing of the system
unit.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 1-11


Technical data Introduction

1-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration
This chapter provides information on the functions of the components and their
integration into the device.

Block diagrams
The following block diagrams show the connections between the individual
components.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-1


Operator

2-2
keyboard
Operating Reardoor
Power input panel lock sensor IDCU
Stereo- Stereo- SOP
VGA only Rearload speaker speaker Loadspeaker button control (door 2)
Keyboard only Rearload Receipt printer
(left) (right) (door 1)
Mouse
COM 2 AZM

User guidance
COM 1
Block diagrams

LCD-lighting on/off Special electronics


(III)

print

Sensor
Power

Capacitor
LCD save
print DIP EDM
SWIPE push-in Camera

(+5,+12,-12,+24V)
System wiring diagram

CIM 86

Power distributor
card card IDCU Operator or
Touch- panel
reader reader
Softkey
Softkey

EPP
screen
A C
Controller Central power
supply
12 V B B B PIN
keyboard

V.24 9-channel case distributor


Channel 7

Channel 2

Channel 5
Channel 3
Channel 9

Control
switched
switched

Channel 4

Channel 6

switched
Channel 14

Channel 15

Power output
unswitched

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual


Power output Safe door
Power input sensor

Power distributor
Power switch
Receipt Cash-out module MM
Shutter interface
printer printer (ZAC-NG)
UPS

Safety switch
Customer
connection
MM
module
Logo
(in ATM frame!)

DCE Customer Intruder alarm system cable


connector V.24 video
Power socket Sensor (Camera)
(country specific)

01750030886 A
Function and Integration
Function and Integration Block diagrams

Cash-out module

Powersave-Print or
central power supply unit Safety
V.24 distributor V.24 switch
channel 4 AZM

Additional Safe door


transport sensor

Portrait camera

Voltage distributor 24V


Portrait
camera
Video

Audio Standard

Loudspeakers on / in the
customer panel

L R

PC sound card
Line Out
(Speaker Out)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-3


Block diagrams Function and Integration

Powersave feature

Power
supply +24 V
unit
Powersave-Print

X3

(e.g. AZM)
24 V load
X4

X2
Connectors ‘Intern.
Inputs/Outputs II’
X5

Connector
‘Power distributor’

X6

and fan control

Extension unit
Activation of
Special
X1

lit arrows
electronics III X7

Power
distributor

2-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration Power supply

Power supply

Mains voltage
The device is equipped with the central power distributor 0323900000 to
supply the components with mains voltage.
The power distributor is connected with the UPS (optional) by means of a
power cable. The UPS is connected with the building installation by means of a
power cable.
Any optional modem that is installed must not be connected to the
power distributor. It must always be connected to an external power
outlet.

The on/off switch can be used as a central system switch for all components
connected to the power distributor.
The standard device is equipped with the 00323501000 power supply unit.

Direct voltage supply

The required DC voltages for all components without a power supply unit
of their own are generated in the central power supply unit.

Connection of cash-out module, receipt printer and journal printer


Due to the required power, these components must be connected to
the 24-V connectors B1, B2 and B3 of the power supply unit
0003235.xx (20 A outputs).

Connection of cash-out module (only operating system WinNT)


The 24 V voltage for the cash-out module can be controlled via the special
electronics by the application by means of the ’Powersave-Print’ assembly
(see the section "Powersave feature" in the block diagrams). Switching-off of
the cash-out module can be performed whenever there is no cash transaction
to be carried out.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-5


Power supply Function and Integration

Power distribution
DC voltages are distributed through power cables with the necessary
branches.

Pin assignment for 5-pin AMP connector


Contact Voltage
1 GND
2 + 24 V
3 +5V
4 - 12 V
5 + 12 V

Pin assignment for 2-pin AMP connector


Contact Voltage
1 GND
2 + 24 V

2-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration Special electronics

Special electronics

Functions used
The following functions of the special electronics can be used:
− Central on/off switch
− Monitoring a power failure
− Monitoring the door contact
− Control of mains voltage
− Control of DC power supply
− Control of powersaving switch for cash-out module (Powersave Print)
− Switching on user guidance
− SOP switch for setting operator mode
− Customer connector panel input / output
− Keyboard signals from PIN keypad and softkeys
− Loudspeaker

Signal assignment of user guidance

Connector of SE 01750003214 (control of user guidance)


Signal Bit Component
Power source 1 0 IDCU
Control output 2 1
Power source 3 2 Receipt printer
Power source 4 3 Cash-out module
Power source 5 4
Power source 6 5
Power source 7 6
Control output 8 7

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-7


Sound system Audio Standard Function and Integration

Sound system Audio Standard


The system is supplied with the Audio Standard sound system.
The connection plan is shown in the block diagram in the section "Audio
Standard".
The loudspeakers in the customer panel are directly connected to the sound
card in the system unit.
Volume control is performed by the driver software for the sound card.

CCTV monitoring
The cash dispensing process can be monitored by a video camera.
The connection plan is shown in the block diagram in the section "Portrait
camera".

SOP button
If the system has a SOP button, the operator can press the button to tell the
application that he or she wishes to perform operating or maintenance tasks
on the system.

2-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration System unit (PC)

System unit (PC)

Overview
The ProCash 2000 cash dispenser is equipped with the following PC:

Description / CPU RAM HDD CD-ROM


Material no.
SCENIC 661 Pentium III 450MHz 64 MB 4.0 GB IDE 40-speed
01750025776 IDE

LPT assignment
The ProCash 2000 does not require a parallel interface.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-9


System unit (PC) Function and Integration

COM assignment

Component on PC
UPS (optional) COM 1
Touch controller COM 2

Component on Rocketport
CH 1
Operator Panel CH 2
Special electronics III CH 3
Cash-out module CH 4
ID card reader, hybrid card CH 5
reader (also DIP or swipe card
reader if required)
Journal printer ND98 CH 6
EDM or EPP CH 7
CH 8
CIM 86 or modulated feature CH 9
module
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
Camera control CH 14
Receipt printer ND9C/ND9E CH 15
CH 16

COM Interface on PC
CH Channel on V.24 distributor (Rocketport)

The components are connected via the 9-channel case distributor


i (01750031729).

2-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration System unit (PC)

SCENIC PC system settings

Component Possible Set I/O Poss. Set Poss. Set Special


I/O addr. addr. interrupts IRQ DMA DMA features
(hex) (hex)
Keyboard - - 1 1 - -

COM1 02F8, 03F8 3,4 4 - - IRQ can be


03F8, switched off
02E8,
03E8
COM2 02F8, 03F8 3,4 3 - - IRQ can be
03F8, switched off
02E8,
03E8
Par.interface 0278, 0378 5, 7 7 1,3 IRQ can be
0378 switched
LPT1
off,
ECP
occupies
DMA
RTC - - 8 8 - -
USB contr. PnP - - -

Mouse contr. - - 12 - - - IRQ


switched off
Num. proc. - - 13 13 - -
IDE contr. 1 - 01F0 14 14 - -
-01F7
IDE contr. 2 - 0170 15 15 - -
-0177

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-11


System unit (PC) Function and Integration

Component Possible Set I/O Poss. Set Poss. Set Special


I/O addr. addr. interrupts IRQ DMA DMA features
(hex) (hex)
Free - - 5,9,10,11, 0,1,3,
resources 12 5,6,7
Rocketport PnP one IRQ -
16-channel
PCI
Audio card PnP
SOLO1
DU78 Va 0220, 0220 5, 10, 11, 5 0, 1, 0
0260, 12, 15 3, N
-022E 1
02A0,
02E0
EtherLink XL PnP one IRQ - -
3Com PCI
X.25 0200, 0360 3, 4, 5, 7, 5 - -
0210, ... 9, 10, 11,
Eicon C21 -036F
03E0 12, 15
Token Ring 0A20, 0A20 3, 5, 7, 10, 5 3, 5, 6 6
1A20, 11, 12, 15
Madge 16/4 + -0A2F
2A20,
3A20
LCD graphics 03C0 03C0 - - - -
card AGP
DotCard 690

2-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration System unit (PC)

Overview of PC cards
W wide area network S system control C components
L local area network D display M multimedia

Card BUS W L S D C M

Eicon card C21 ISA X


No.: 01750011987
Fast Etherlink XL 3C905B-TX PCI X
No.: 01750019090
Token-Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 ISA X
No.: 01750012715
DU78-Va or DU78-Vb ISA X
No.: 01750007738 / 01750025516
+ adapter IHSS (DCE4 ADO
connection)
No.: 66660 00 5 12
V.24 Rocketport 16-channel PCI X
No.: 01750014685
Dotcard 690 AGP X
No.: 01750023889
Sound card TT Solo 1 PCI X X
No.: 01750022769

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-13


Monitors Function and Integration

Monitors
The following monitors can be integrated into the customer panel of the
ProCash 2000:

LCD box 10.4” SVGA Dotronic (01750020552) in conjunction with touch


(01750026957) or softkey version *
LCD box 10.4” VGA Dotronic (01750020555) in conjunction with touch
(01750026957) or softkey version *
LCD box 12,1" SVGA (01750020892) in conjunction with softkey version **
LCD box 15'' XGA (01750020326) in conjunction with Touchkit 01750019703
(without LCF) or with Touchkit 01750032690 (with LCF).

* Softkey keyboards for 10,4“ LCD monitors


The following softkey keypads can be used:
− Standard: (01750002167)
− Standard Braille: (01750016329)
− NDC: (01750002164)
− NDC Braille: (01750007465)
− DDC: (01750015713)
− DDC Braille: (01750010427)

** Softkey keyboards for 12,1“ LCD monitors


The following softkey keypads can be used:
− Standard: (01750025642)
− Standard Braille: (01750024267)
− NDC: (01750025643)
− NDC Braille: (01750024268)
− DDC: (01750025644)
− DDC Braille: (01750024269)

The Dotcard-690 AGP graphics card (01750023889) is needed in order to run


the monitors. In addition, either the Dotcard - LVPL or Dotcard PL adapter
interface card is needed depending on the monitor installed. For further
information please refer to the relevant chapters on the monitors.

2-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration Operating the flat displays

Operating the flat displays


To operate the various flat LC displays, the graphics card in the system control
unit and the interface card in the display assembly have to be configured
appropriately using microswitches and jumpers.

Microswitch and jumper positions


For the microswitch and jumper positions, please refer to the relevant sections
of the chapters on the graphics cards "Dotcard-690 AGP", "Dotcard-LVPL" and
"Dotcard-PL adapter".
Any jumpers not included in the following tables in this section must remain in
the manufacturer’s default settings.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-15


Operating the flat displays Function and Integration

Setting the graphics card


The settings given in the table below apply to the Dotcard-690 AGP
i graphics card.

LCD assembly DIP switch S1 DIP switch S2 Jumper JP9


10,4“ VGA
ON 12 3 4 5 6 ON 12 3 4 5 6

01750020555 OFF OFF 1 2 3

10,4“ SVGA
ON 12 3 4 5 6 ON 12 3 4 5 6

01750020552 OFF OFF 1 2 3

12,1“ SVGA
ON 12 3 4 5 6 ON 12 3 4 5 6

01750020892 OFF OFF 1 2 3

15“ XGA
ON 12 3 4 5 6 ON 12 3 4 5 6

01750020326 OFF OFF 1 2 3

2-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration Operating the flat displays

Setting the interface card


The 10,4" and 12,1" flat displays detailed in the section "Setting the graphics
card" contain the Dotcard-LVPL.
DIP switch S1 Jumper JP1, JP5, JP6

Dotcard LVPL
ON 12 3 4 5 6

OFF 1 2 3

PL adapter settings
The 15" display described in the section "Setting the graphics card" contains
the Dotcard-PL adapter and is run in the default settings.
Jumper 1 Jumper 5

Dotcard PL adapter

1 2 3 1 2 3

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-17


Printers Function and Integration

Printers
The following printers can be used in the ProCash 2000:
− Receipt printer ND9E (01750020561),
− Receipt printer ND9C (01750017360) or (017500267542),
− Journal printer ND98 (01750003288).

For further information on the printers and different versions of printers that are
used, please refer to the block diagrams in this chapter and in the relevant
chapters on printers in this manual.

Card reader ID18


Card readers from the ID18 device family can be installed in the ProCash
2000.
For information on the versions used, please refer to the chapter "Card Reader
ID18".

Card reader ID24


Card readers of the ID24 device family (push-in card reader or SWIPE card
reader) can be installed in the ProCash 2000.
For information please refer to the chapters "DIP Push-In Card Reader
(ID24102114)" or "SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214)".

2-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Function and Integration Keyboards and keypads

Keyboards and keypads

The following keyboards and keypads can be used in the ProCash 2000:
− PIN keypad,
− EPP keyboard.

The optional softkeys are controlled via the special electronics module
01750003214.
The EPP keyboard is connected via the V.24 interface and the power
distributor. For assignment of the V.24 channels for EPP, please refer to the
block diagrams in this chapter.
The PIN keyboard is directly connected to the special electronics module
01750003214. If softkeys exist, they are connected to the special electronics
module via the print of the softkeys.

Uninterruptible power supply unit (UPS)


When the power supply is interrupted, the UPS starts supplying voltage to the
device.
For further details on the UPS installed in the device, please refer to the
chapter "Smart UPS 700".

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 2-19


Uninterruptible power supply unit (UPS) Function and Integration

2-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Power Supply Unit 00323501000

Description
The power supply unit 03235.01 supplies all components which are not
equipped with a power supply unit with the necessary DC voltage. The rated
voltage (115 V or 230 V) is set via a slide switch. A built-in fan provides the
cooling. All outputs are protected against short-circuit as well as against
overvoltages or undervoltages. In addition, there is protection against
overtemperature. In case of overvoltage or overtemperature, the power supply
unit turns itself off immediately. It can only be turned on again by turning the
line voltage off and on. In the event of undervoltage or short-circuit conditions
at the outputs, the power supply unit also turns itself off immediately, but
power is restored automatically.

Operating state indicator


The green LED at the special electronics indicates that the special electronics
has switched on the power supply unit.

Power failure
In case of a power failure the power supply unit interrupts the switched
voltages (+ 24 V, + 5 V, + 12 V) unless this is prevented by the device
configuration setting of the special electronics.
The power supply unit automatically restores the voltages after the time of
interruption has elapsed, if the mains is available again.
The control is carried out via the signals NAN, NEN and STNANT.
NAN: The signal is created by the power supply unit, if the mains voltage
drops below 170 V (switch position 230 V) or 85 V (switch position
115 V) for more than 26 ( ± 4) ms.
NEN: The +5 V, +12 V and +24 V outputs for the switchable voltage are
controlled with this signal of the special electronics.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-1


Technical data Power Supply Unit 00323501000

STNANT: Using this signal the special electronics can control via the
configuration job, whether the power supply unit turns the switchable
voltages off automatically in accordance with the NAN switch-off
conditions or not.

Technical data

Pin assignment

Nom. voltage selection


230

Conn. B1 Conn. B2 Conn. B3

Contact 1

Connector A Connector C

Contact 1

3-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Power Supply Unit 00323501000 Technical data

Connector A (AMP, 8 pin M)


Special electronics and DC distribution connection

Pin Assignment
1 0V
2 * + 24 V (switched)
3 NEN
4 STNANT
5 NAN
6 + 12 V (Standby)
7 + 5 V (Standby)
8 - 12 V (Standby)
* Current limitation at the output to 8 A together with contact 2 of connector C

Connector B1, B2, B3 (AMP, 2 pin M)

Pin Assignment
1 0V
2 * + 24 V (switched)
* Momentary peak current: max. 20 A

Connector C (AMP, 5 pin M)

Pin Assignment
1 0V
2 * + 24 V (switched)
3 + 5 V (switched)
4 - 12 V (Standby)
5 + 12 V (switched)
* Current limitation at the output to 8 A together with contact 2 of connector A

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-3


Technical data Power Supply Unit 00323501000

Input voltages
Input voltage (switch-selectable): 220 - 240 V ( 187 - 264 V)
110 - 120 V ( 93 - 132 V)
Frequency: 48 - 65 Hz

Output voltages

Output Voltage Tolerance Comment


1 - 12 V ± 10 % standby
2 + 5,2 V ± 3% standby
3 + 12 V ± 10 % standby
4 + 5,2 V ± 3% switched
5 + 24 V * switched
6 + 12 V ± 10 % switched
* Voltage: max. 26.4 V / min. 24 V under load ≤ 10 A

Miscellaneous
Leakage current: max. 1 mA
Dimensions: 180 x 220 x 92 (width / length / height in mm)

3-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Power Distributor 0323900000
Power is supplied via a rubber plug (position 4). Two of the three rubber plug
sockets used to supply the components with line voltage are switched over
relays.
The relays are controlled via the special electronics.
The power distributor has a two-pin On / Off switch. The built-in board has a
sensitive fuse (8 A / slow, dimensions: 6.35 x 31.75 mm).

Schalter Switch Commutateur Steckerbelegung Netzverteiler


Netzeingang maximaler Gesamtstrom = 8 A
Power input
Entrée du réseau Connector assignment
1 Power distributor
Netzausgang, ungeschaltet whole current maximum = 8 A
Power output, non-switched
Sortie du réseau commutée
2 Attribution de signaux sur le connecteur
Netzausgang, geschaltet Connecteur de tension
Power output, switched ampérage maximum = 8 A
Sortie du réseau on
3
Netzausgang, geschaltet
Power output, switched
Sortie du réseau on

If the device has a CRT monitor, the monitor is usually connected to the
switched power output 3 (monitor).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-5


Power Distributor 0323900000

Pin assignment of power distributor control (Berg, 6-pin M)

Pin Name
1 +24 V
2 +24 V (relay control power output 2)
3 GND
4 GND
5
6 24 V (relay control power output 3) monitor

3-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Special Electronics Module III
01750003214
The compact special electronics represents, in addition to the built-in PC, the
central control and monitoring unit of the system and is connected to the PC
via the V.24 interface.
The status messages of the special electronics are evaluated by the software
and the jobs are executed in accordance with the device configuration defined
in the software.

Controls and indicators


Specific operating states of the system can be recognised on the LED display
panel. The yellow LEDs are only significant for the UPS mode of a system with
an uninterruptible power supply.
A key is used to switch the system on and off.
An integrated volume control (e.g. for a built-in loudspeaker) and a monitor
switch are available. Using this switch you can define whether the monitor
should be permanently turned on independent of the software job.

Mode of operation
As soon as the line voltage is applied to the power supply unit, the special
electronics is ready to operate. The logic has 2 operating states.
− Switched on status Indicator: green LED
− Standby status Indicator: red LED

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-7


Switch-on characteristics Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

In the switched on state of the system, the red LED is alternately switched on
and off each time the pushbutton switch is operated. The lit status of the red
LED is communicated to the program as "switch-off request". The program
then switches the special electronics to standby status via a corresponding job.
Depending on the type of job, the logic is switched off as follows:
− Permanent OFF Indicator: red LED
− Momentary OFF (cold start) Indicator: red LED +
green LED flashes

In standby mode, all individual components of the system are switched off and
the special electronics processes only the signals of the key.

Switch-on characteristics
When the line power is turned on, the last operating state before the line power
was turned off will be restored automatically. If the special electronics is in
standby mode, the ON/OFF key must be pushed. The self-service system is
then powered up with a delay of approx. 6 seconds.

Controlling the power supply


The switchable voltages of the power supply are controlled by the signals
NAN, NEN and STNANT:
NAN: The signal is created by the power supply unit, if the line voltage
drops below 170 V (switch position 230 V) or 85 V (switch position
115 V) for more than 26 ( ± 4) ms.
NEN: The +5 V, +12 V and 24 V outputs for the switchable voltage are
controlled with this signal of the special electronics.
STNANT: Using this signal the special electronics can control via the
configuration job, whether the power supply unit turns the switchable
voltages automatically off in accordance with the NAN switch-off
conditions or not.

3-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Special Electronics Module III 01750003214 UPS mode

UPS mode
Usually, specific status signals (e.g. end of capacity or switch-on status) can
be scanned electronically and an external control can be performed with
uninterruptible power supplies.
The two yellow LEDs may be used as follows:
UPS active/power failure Indication: yellow LED next to the red LED
End of capacity Indication: yellow LED next to the green LED

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-9


System environment diagram Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

System environment diagram

24 V
24 V on > 18 V
GND
Power socket
Logo illuminat.
Monitor
+24V
+12V
-12V
VCC
GND
NACHEK
NEN
STNANT

24 V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6

2
Magnet lock door 1
Magnet lock door 2

4 6 8 10 12 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 26
6 x---->
24 V
Magnet lock door 3

24 V
Ready indicator
Reserve output 1
Reserve output 2
switch
Monitor

Door 1 closed
button
On/off

Door 2 closed
Door 3 closed
5V

5V
24 V

SOP button / switch

6 x---->
Sensor
Reserve acknowledgement 1
Reserve acknowledgement 2
4 x---->

24-V device control On/off button external


3,4
1,2, 5,6 7

Tone generator

I²C bus- (only output)


5V

Remote switch-on
11 24
Loudspeaker
5V
9

LCD illumination on/off 1,3,5,7 24 V


14,16,18,20,22 GND
11

ATS power distributor


Volume

RxD
2 3 4 8 5

5V
TxD
24 V

Fan function inquiry DTR


13

CTS
5V GND
15

Logo illumination inquiry


4 x ---->

Customer relay 1
5 6 7 8 11 23 10 22 21 24 17 18 19 20

5V Customer relay 2
Customer relay 3
Customer relay 4
17

LCD illumination monitoring


4 x ---->

19,20 5 V Customer input 1


21,22 24 V Customer input 2
24 V

23 +12 V Customer input 3


24 -12 V GND Customer input 4
2 x ---->

8,10.12,14,16,18,25,26 UPS end of capacity


UPS switched on
12 V

Logo illumination
NACHECK
(Reserve output 3)
Current source

ST NANT
Door 3 closed
5V

UEMA relay NC
3 4 9
5V

UEMA relay NO
UEMA relay Common
12 x

1,2 5V
2x
6x
2x

14,15,16 24 V
12,13,25 GND
Softkeys
Jumper
Arrow illumination

Softkeys
Main keyboard

3-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


F ro n t v ie w

re d 1 6 1 1 14

01750030886 A
y e llo w
y e llo w

g re e n
1 1 1

Volu m e co ntro l

B u tto n M on ito r s w itc h Intern al R ig h t L e ft C u stom er -s p ecific


LE D b loc k O n / O ff O n / O ff in p u ts / o u tpu ts I V.24 so ftk eys inp uts / ou tp uts

S id e v ie w , le ft S id e v ie w , rig h t
Views of the special electronics

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual


2 2 2 1 2

1 1 1 1 1

P ow er sou rce P o w er d istributo r Illu m in ate d P IN Jum p ers Intern al


P ow er sup p ly con tro l arr ow s key b oa rd in p u ts / o u tpu ts II

3-11
Special Electronics Module III 01750003214 Views of the special electronics
Pin assignment Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

Pin assignment

Power source, power supply unit control

Pin Assignment
1 24 V
2 + 12 V
3 - 12 V
4 5V
5 GND
6 NACHECK
7 NEN
8 STNANT

Power distributor

Pin Assignment
1 24 V
2 24 V, delayed switch-on
3 GND
4 Ecological power distributor
5 Logo illumination
6 Monitor

3-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Special Electronics Module III 01750003214 Pin assignment

Internal inputs/outputs I

Pin Assignment
1 24 V
2 Door interlock 1
3 24 V
4 Door interlock 2
5 24 V
6 Door interlock 3
7 24 V
8 Control of the ready indicator
9 Reserved input
10 Reserved output 1
11 Loudspeaker
12 Reserved output 2
13 Feedback door 1
14 GND
15 Feedback door 2
16 GND
17 Feedback door 3
18 GND
19 Feedback SOP key
20 GND
21 Feedback proximity sensor
22 GND
23 Spare feedback 1
24 5V
25 Spare feedback 2
26 External ON/OFF key

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-13


Pin assignment Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

Customer-specific inputs/outputs

Pin Assignment
1 5V
2 5V
3 NC UEMA relay (closed)
4 NO UEMA relay (open)
5 Relay for external features 1
6 Relay for external features 2
7 Relay for external features 3
8 Relay for external features 4
9 Common UEMA relay
10 Feedback from customer contact 3
11 Feedback from customer contact 1
12 GND
13 GND
14 24 V
15 24 V
16 24 V
17 Logo illumination control
18 NACHECK
19 STNANT
20 Feedback door 3
21 Feedback from UPS: Battery capacity low
22 Feedback from customer contact 4
23 Feedback from customer contact 2
24 Feedback from UPS: power fail / UPS mode
25 GND

3-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Special Electronics Module III 01750003214 Pin assignment

V.24 control of the SE

Pin Assignment
1
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6
7
8 CTS
9

Softkeys on the left

Pin Assignment
1 Matrix signal Y0
2 Matrix signal Y1
3 Matrix signal Y2
4 Matrix signal Y3
5 Matrix signal X2

Softkeys on the right

Pin Assignment
1 Matrix signal Y0
2 Matrix signal Y1
3 Matrix signal Y2
4 Matrix signal Y3
5 Matrix signal X3

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-15


Pin assignment Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

Control of operator prompts


(illuminated arrows)

Pin Assignment
1 Power source 1
2 GND
3 Power source 2
4 GND
5 Power source 3
6 GND
7 Power source 4
8 GND
9 Power source 5
10 GND
11 Power source 6
12 GND
13 Power source 7
14 GND
15 Power source 8
16 5V
17 24 V
18 24 V
19 + 12 V
20 - 12 V

3-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Special Electronics Module III 01750003214 Pin assignment

PIN keyboard matrix

Pin Assignment
1 Matrix signal Y0
2 Matrix signal Y1
3 Matrix signal Y2
4 Matrix signal Y3
5 Matrix signal Y4
6 Matrix signal Y5
7 Matrix signal Y6
8 Matrix signal Y7
9 Matrix signal X0
10 Matrix signal X1
11 Matrix signal X2
12 Matrix signal X3

2 externally accessible jumpers

Pin Assignment
1 Mode 1
2 GND
3 GND
4 Mode 2

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 3-17


Pin assignment Special Electronics Module III 01750003214

Internal inputs/outputs II

Pin Assignment
1 24 V control 1
2 24 V control 2
3 24 V control 3
4 24 V control 4
5 I2C bus data, only output
6 I2C bus clock, only output
7 Remote power-on
8 GND
9 LCD illumination control
10 GND
11 Power distributor clock
12 GND
13 Fan monitoring
14 GND
15 Logo illumination inquiry
16 GND
17 LCD illumination inquiry
18 GND
19 5V
20 5V
21 24 V
22 24 V
23 + 12 V
24 - 12 V
25 GND
26

3-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs
Series SCENIC 6xx with ATX system board D1107

Overview of PC variants
− SCENIC 651, Audio optional, CD-ROM, Pentium II 400, 64 MB
SDRAM (order number 01750022338)
− SCENIC 651, Audio, CD-ROM, Pentium II 400, 64 MB SDRAM SCSI
(order number 01750023928)
− SCENIC 661, Audio, CD-ROM, Pentium III 450, 64 MB SDRAM
(order number 01750025776)
− SCENIC 661, Audio, CD-ROM, Pentium III 550, 64 MB SDRAM
(order number 01750029760)

Supplied software
− ISA configuration tool
DOS boot diskette for registering additional ISA cards.
− Driver for Cirrus GD5436/46
− Driver for MGA Millenium
If a different graphic resolution is required, this can be implemented
with the associated graphic drivers. The diskettes supplied contain
installation files for the various operating systems.
− Driver for audio
Only for PCs with audio. If the TT SOLO 1 sound card driver is not
available in the respective operating system, it can be installed using
the driver diskettes.
− Driver for CD-ROM
Only for PCs with CD-ROM drive. If the CD-ROM driver is not
available in the respective operating system, it can be installed using
the driver diskettes.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-1


Technical data SCENIC 6XX PCs

Technical data

SCENIC 651 PII/400 IDE CD-R64 MB

ATX-motherboard D1107
Chip set Intel 440BX PIIX4E
Microprocessor PII 400 MHz (max. 450)
Processor base Slot 1
Front Side Bus 100 MHz
Second Level Cache 512 KB (integr. in PII)
Memory 64 MB (max. 768) SDRAM
DIMM slot 3 (SDRAM)
Flash EPROM BIOS-Update via diskette possible

Interfaces: 2 x serial (9 pin)


1 x parallel (25 pin, EPP, ECP)
1 x keyboard (PS/2)
1 x mouse (PS/2)
2 x USB

Floppy disk drive 3.5", 1.44 MB

Hard disk controller Ultra ATA-33


Hard disk capacity / Access time 4.3 GB / <=10ms

CD-ROM drive 32 x IDE

Graphics board Matrox MGA G100 (AGP)


Picture refresh memory 4 MB

Audio board Optional: TT Solo 1

4-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Technical data

Slots 1 x AGP
1 x ISA (max. height of PCI-card)
1 x ISA / PCI (max. height of PCI-card)
4 x PCI

Slots for drives 5


accessible from the outside: 1 x 3.5", 2 x 5.25"
internal: 2 x 3.5"

Electrical ratings
Line voltage 110-120V/ 220-240V (switchable)
Line frequency 50-60 Hz
Max. power dissipation 145 Watt

Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D) 135 x 145 x 455 mm
Weight ca. 9 kg

Compatibility (references) Microsoft operating system


(HCT test / HCL entry)
Novell Netware
(Yes, Netware Tested and approved)
OS/2
(IBM compatibility list)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-3


Technical data SCENIC 6XX PCs

SCENIC 651 PII/400 SCSI CD-R64 MB

ATX-motherboard D1107
Chip set Intel 440BX PIIX4E
Microprocessor PII 400 MHz (max. 450)
Processor base Slot 1
Front Side Bus 100 MHz
Second Level Cache 512 kB (integr. in PII)
Memory 64 MB (max. 768) SDRAM
DIMM slot 3 (SDRAM)
Flash EPROM BIOS-Update via diskette possible

Interfaces: 2 x serial (9-pin)


1 x parallel (25 pin, EPP, ECP)
1 x keyboard (PS/2)
1 x mouse (PS/2)
2 x USB

Floppy disk drive 3.5", 1.44 MB

Hard disk UW
Hard disk capacity / Access time min. 4 GB / <=10ms

CD-ROM drive 40 x SCSI

Graphics board Matrox MGA G100 (AGP)


Picture refresh memory 4 MB

SCSI-Controller AHA 2940 UW

Audio board TT Solo 1


Interfaces: 1 x microphone
1 x Game port
1 x Line in
1 x Line out / Speaker

4-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Technical data

Slots 1 x AGP
1 x ISA (max. height of PCI-card)
1 x ISA / PCI (max. height of PCI-card)
4 x PCI

Slots for drives 5


accessible from the outside: 1 x 3.5", 2 x 5.25"
internal: 2 x 3.5"

Electrical ratings
Line voltage 110-120V/ 220-240V (selectable)
Line frequency 50-60 Hz
Max. power dissipation 145 Watt

Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D) 135 x 145 x 455 mm
Weight ca. 9 kg

Compatibility (references) Microsoft operating system


(HCT test / HCL entry)
Novell Netware
(Yes, Netware Tested and approved)
OS/2
(IBM compatibility list)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-5


Technical data SCENIC 6XX PCs

SCENIC 661 PIII/450 IDE CD-R64 MB

ATX motherboard D1107


Chip set Intel 440BX PIIX4E
Micro processor PIII 450 MHz
Processor base Slot 1
Front Side Bus 100 MHz
Second Level Cache 512 kB (integr. in PIII)
Memory 64 MB (max. 768) SDRAM
DIMM slot 3 (SDRAM)
Flash EPROM BIOS-Update via diskette possible

Interfaces 2 x serial (9 pin)


1 x parallel (25 pin, EPP, ECP)
1 x keyboard (PS/2)
1 x mouse (PS/2)
2 x USB
1 x Monitor (15 pin VGA)

Floppy disk drive 3.5“, 1.44 MB

Hard disk Ultra ATA-33


Hard disk capacity / Access time 4.3 GB / <=10ms

CD-ROM drive 40 x IDE

Graphics board Matrox MGA G200 (AGP)


Picture refresh memory 8 MB

Slots 1 x AGP (used for graphic)


1 x ISA (max. height of PCI-card)
1 x ISA / PCI (max. height of PCI-card)
4 x PCI

4-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Technical data

Slots for drives 5


accessible from the outside: 1 x 3.5“, 2 x 5.25“
internal: 2 x 3.5“

Electrical ratings
Line voltage 110 - 120V / 220 - 240V (switchable)
Line frequency 50 - 60 Hz
Max. power dissipation 145 Watt

Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D) 135 x 145 x 455 mm
Weight ca. 9 kg

Compatibility (references) Microsoft operating system


(HCT test / HCL entry)
Novell Netware
(Yes, Netware Tested and approved)
OS/2
(IBM compatibility list)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-7


Technical data SCENIC 6XX PCs

SCENIC 661 PIII/550 IDE CD-R64 MB

ATX motherboard D1107


Chip set Intel 440BX PIIX4E
Micro processor PIII 550 MHz
Processor base Slot 1
Front Side Bus 100 MHz
Second Level Cache 512 kB (integr. in PIII)
Memory 64 MB (max. 768) SDRAM
DIMM slot 3 (SDRAM)
Flash EPROM BIOS-Update via diskette possible

Interfaces 2 x serial (9 pin)


1 x parallel (25 pin, EPP, ECP)
1 x keyboard (PS/2)
1 x mouse (PS/2)
2 x USB
1 x Monitor (15 pin VGA)

Floppy disk drive 3.5“, 1.44 MB

Hard disk Ultra ATA-33


Hard disk capacity / Access time 4.3 GB / <=10ms

CD-ROM drive 40 x IDE

Graphics board Matrox MGA G200 (AGP)


Picture refresh memory 8 MB

Slots 1 x AGP (used for graphic)


1 x ISA (max. height of PCI-card)
1 x ISA / PCI (max. height of PCI-card)
4 x PCI

4-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Technical data

Slots for drives 5


accessible from the outside: 1 x 3.5“, 2 x 5.25“
internal: 2 x 3.5“

Electrical ratings
Line voltage 110 - 120V / 220 - 240V (switchable)
Line frequency 50 - 60 Hz
Max. power dissipation 145 Watt

Dimensions
Dimensions (H x W x D) 135 x 145 x 455 mm
Weight ca. 9 kg

Compatibility (references) Microsoft operating system


(HCT test / HCL entry)
Novell Netware
(Yes, Netware Tested and approved)
OS/2
(IBM compatibility list)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-9


ATX system board D1107 SCENIC 6XX PCs

ATX system board D1107


2 3
1

AGP

ISA2

ISA1
PCI 3

PCI 2

PCI 1
PCI5

PCI4

Slot 1

2 5

1 3 4 6

1 Serial port 4 Parallel port 1


2 PS/2 mouse connection 5 USB connection 2
3 PS/2 keyboard connection 6 USB connection 1

4-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs ATX system board D1107

1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11

15
14
2 3
1

13

AGP

ISA2

ISA1
PCI 3

PCI 2

PCI 1
PCI5

PCI4
Slot 1

12

1 I² connection* 8 Fan 2*
2 Serial chipcard reader interface 9 IDE drive 1 and 2 (primary)
or serial port 2 10 Connection for operating panel
3 Power supply 11 IrDA*
4 Floppy disk drive 12 USB chipcard reader*
5 IDE drive 3 and 4 (secondary) 13 Fan 1 (e. g. for processor) *
6 Wake On LAN 14 Power supply monitoring
7 On/Off push button* 15 Cabinet monitoring

* These plugs do not have to be available on the motherboard.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-11


Resource table SCENIC 6XX PCs

Resource table
Used IRQ Usable Usable Assigned
IRQ address DMA
(hex)
Keyboard IRQ1
Serial port COM1 3 03F8, 02F8,
4 03E8, 02E8
Serial port COM2 3 02E8, 02F8
4 03E8, 03F8
Disc drive controller IRQ6 2
Parallel port LPT1 5, 7 0278, 0378, 0, 1, 3
03BC
RTC IRQ8
USB controller PnP
Mouse controller IRQ12
Numeric processor IRQ13
IDE controller 1 IRQ14 01F0-01F7
IDE controller 2 IRQ15 0170-0177

‘Used IRQ’ = Set interrupts when delivered.


‘Assigned IRQ’ = You can use these interrupts for the corresponding
software.
‘Assigned = You can use these address for the corresponding
address’ software.
‘Assigned DMA’ = You can use these DMAs for the corresponding
software.

4-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs PCI bus interrupts

PCI bus interrupts


The following table shows how the PCI bus interrupts are placed on the
motherboard.

PCI bus interrupts Unit on the motherboard


A PCI bus slot 5
A PCI bus slot 1
A AGP slot
B PCI bus slot 2
C PCI bus slot 3
D PCI bus slot 4
D USB controller

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-13


Settings with switches SCENIC 6XX PCs

Settings with switches


2 3
1

AGP

ISA2

ISA1
PCI 3

PCI 2

PCI 1
PCI5

PCI4

Slot 1

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPEN / OFF

Switch 1 = must always be set to off Switch 5 = Clock frequency


Switch 2 = Recover system BIOS Switch 6 = Clock frequency
Switch 3 = Write protection for floppy drive Switch 7 = Clock frequency
Switch 4 = Reserved Switch 8 = Clock frequency

4-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Settings with switches

Switch 1:
Switch 1 must always be set to ’off’.

Switch 2: Recover system BIOS


Switch 2 makes it possible to restore the system BIOS after a faulty update.
To restore the system BIOS you need a "Flash BIOS floppy".

Switch position Description


on The system BIOS starts from drive a: and the inserted
"Flash BIOS floppy" overwrites the system BIOS on the
motherboard.
off Normal operation (standard setting).

Switch 3: Write protection for floppy drive


Switch 3 defines whether it is possible to write and delete floppies with the
standard floppy drive if the write protection is disabled in the BIOS (set the field
Disk Write in menu Security to enabled).

Switch position Description


on Write protection is active for the floppy drive.
off Floppies can be read, written and deleted (default
setting).

Switch 4:
Switch 4 is reserved.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-15


Settings with switches SCENIC 6XX PCs

Switches 5 to 8: Setting the clock frequency


For the inserted processor the switches have to be set as shown in
the following tables.
There are also processors, which always work with the right frequency
automatically - independent of the position of the switch.
As these new processors do not differ in appearance from the old
ones, we advise to set the switches always in accordance with the
processor type.
This motherboard can be operated with Pentium II processors with
66 MHz or 100 MHz Front Side Bus or with Pentium III processors
with 100 MHz Front Side Bus or with Celeron Processors with 66 MHz
Front Side Bus.
For information on the processors which can be used on this
motherboard, please contact your sales representative or our service
department.

Pentium II with 66 MHz Front Side Bus:

Processor Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8


233 MHz off off on on
266 MHz on on off on
300 MHz off on off on
333 MHz on off off on

4-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Settings with switches

Celeron with 66 MHz Front Side Bus:

Processor Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8


233 MHz off off on on
266 MHz on on off on
300 MHz off on off on
333 MHz on off off on
366 MHz off off off on
400 MHz on on on off
433 MHz off on on off

Pentium II with 100 MHz Front Side Bus:

Processor Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8


350 MHz off off on on
400 MHz on on off on
450 MHz off on off on

Pentium III with 100 MHz Front Side Bus:

Processor Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8


450 MHz off on off on
500 MHz on off off on
550 MHz off off off on

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-17


Extensions SCENIC 6XX PCs

Extensions
Before performing any of the operations described in this chapter,
please unplug the mains plug from the safety socket!
Even when the device has been run down, some parts of the device
(memory modules, AGP and PCI extension assemblies) are still alive.

Should this be the case, the voltage indication light-emitting diode is


on.
During operation, units can become very hot. Note this when you
make extensions on the motherboard. Danger of burning!

4-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Extensions

5 6 7 8 9

4
2 3

3
2
1

AGP

ISA2

ISA1
PCI 3

PCI 2

PCI 1
PCI5

PCI4
Slot 1

1 Slot for processor with heat sink 6 Lithium battery


2 Slot Bank 1 for main memory 7 AGP slot
3 Slot Bank 2 for main memory 8 PCI slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
4 Slot Bank 3 for main memory 9 ISA slots 1, 2
5 voltage indication light-emitting
diode*

* This plug do not have to be available on the motherboard.


AGP and PCI slots support 3.3 V main and auxiliary voltage.
i

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-19


Exchanging the processor SCENIC 6XX PCs

Exchanging the processor


If you want to make an upgrade by means of a new processor, it may
i be necessary to first replace the processor holder on the
motherboard. Should such a replacement be necessary, please
contact our service department.
Depending on the construction of the processor case, the heat sink on
the processor can be moved and the processor can be moved inside
the holder. This is no installation error, but is in line with the
requirements of the manufacturer. Due to this float mounting, a
reliable contact between the processor and the heat sink is assured.
Latches inside the holder prevent the processor from sliding out of it.
If the heat sink on the processor can be moved, then the plugged-in
processor has to be movable inside the holder as well. This
guarantees optimal cooling.
When replacing the processor, hold the processor case at the
processor and the heat sink.

4-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Exchanging the processor

Inserting the processor


The picture shows two types of holders and processors.

2
1
1
2
1
1

• If necessary, remove the terminating assembly.


• Place the processor in the holder (1).
• Push the processor down in the holder and press it into the slot until the
clips left and right click in place. (2).
• Adjust the clock frequency of the new processor with the switches 5 to 8 of
the switch block.
• If the processor has a temperature sensor or a ventilator, connect the
corresponding line with the connector for the temperature sensor or
ventilator on the motherboard.
• Plug in the voltage transformer for the second processor.

Removing the processor


• If the processor has a temperature sensor or a ventilator, lay the
corresponding line.
• Push the clips (2) outwards on both sides of the processor and pull the
processor up out of the holder. If necessary, use a screw driver.
• If necessary, place the terminating assembly in the slot.
• Pull out the voltage transformer for the second processor.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-21


Upgrading main memory SCENIC 6XX PCs

Upgrading main memory


The installation slots for the main memory can be used for 16, 32, 64, 128 and
256 Mbyte SDRAM memory modules in the DIMM format .
Memory modules with different memory capacity can be combined.
DIMM = Dual Inline Memory Module
SDRAM = Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
Only unbuffered 3.3 V memory modules are allowed. Buffered
memory modules are not allowed.
SDRAM memory modules have to be designed for a clock frequency
of 100 MHz or higher (according to PC100 specification).

4-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs Upgrading main memory

Inserting the memory module

• Turn the left and right holders of the respective slot outwards (refer to the
section "Removing the memory module").
• Plug the memory module in the slot (1) until the holders on both sides of
the memory module (2) click in place.

Removing the memory module

• Turn the right and left holders outwards (1).


• Remove the memory module from the slot (2).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-23


Exchanging the lithium battery SCENIC 6XX PCs

Exchanging the lithium battery


Danger of explosion if replaced improperly.
Only use the same battery type or a type recommended by the
manufacturer (CR2032).
Don’t put the lithium battery into the household waste. It will be taken
back at no charge by the manufacturer, dealer or their representative
for recycling or disposal.
Make sure that the lithium battery is put in with correct polarity – plus
pole upwards!

• Lift up the contact spring only a few millimetres (1) so that you can remove
the lithium battery from the holder (2).
• Insert the new lithium battery (use identical type) into the holder (3).

4-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs CMOS-SETUP

CMOS-SETUP

Bios version: V4.06 R 1.04.1107


The device is shipped with the following default settings defined in the PC.

Main

System Time: [hh:mm:ss] current time


System Date: [mm/dd/yy] current date

Diskette A: [1.4M]
Diskette B: [None]

> Hard Disk 1: Value Mbyte (NONE with SCSI)


> Hard Disk 2: NONE
> Hard Disk 3: NONE
> Hard Disk 4: NONE

> Boot Options

Video Display: [EGA/VGA]

Base Memory: 640k


Extended Memory: 63M

Main > Hard Disk 1

Autotype Hard Disk: [Press Enter] (use autom. recognition!)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-25


CMOS-SETUP SCENIC 6XX PCs

Main > Boot Options

POST Error Halt: [No Halt On Any Errors]


Quick Boot: [Disabled]
Quiet Boot: [Disabled]

Boot Sequence:
1. Diskette
2. Hard Disk
3. ATAPI CD-ROM
4. Network

Primary Display [AGP VGA]


> Hard Disk Boot Device
> Diskette Boot Device

Advanced

> Cache Memory


> Peripheral Configuration
> PCI Configuration
> Advanced System Configuration
> Power On/Off
>System Management

Plug & Play O/S: [No] 1)


Reset Configuration Data: [No]
Lock Setup Configuration: [No] 2)

Large Disk Access Mode: [DOS]

1) [No] The BIOS system handles all plug & play functions.
[Yes] The operating system handles part of the plug & play
functions;
Can only be chosen, if a plug & play capable operating system is
used (e. g. Windows 95).
2) [Yes] Allocated IRQ for PCI are handled in Win 95/98.

4-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs CMOS-SETUP

Advanced > Cache Memory

Cache: [Enabled]

Cache System BIOS Area: [Write Protect]


Cache Video BIOS Area: [Write Protect]
Cache DRAM Memory Area: [Write Back]

Advanced > Peripheral Configuration

Serial 1: [Enabled]
Serial 1 Address: [3F8h, IRQ4]
Serial 2: [Enabled]
Serial 2 Address: [2F8h, IRQ3]
Parallel: [Enabled]
Parallel Mode: [Printer] 1)
Parallel Address: [378h, IRQ7]
Parallel Drive: [Disabled]

Diskette Controller: [Enabled]


Hard Disk Controller: [Primary and Secondary] 2)

Mouse Controller: [Disabled]

1) [ECP] when printer with ECP interface is connected


2) [Disabled] PC with SCSI

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-27


CMOS-SETUP SCENIC 6XX PCs

Advanced > PCI Configuration

PCI Interrupt Mapping INTA#: [Auto] 1)


PCI Interrupt Mapping INTB#: [Auto]
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTC#: [Auto]
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTD#: [Auto]

PCI Interrupt Sharing [Auto] 2)

> PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion 3)


> PCI/PnP ISA Memory Region Exclusion 3)
> PCI/PnP DMA Resource Exclusion 3)

1) [Auto] The PCI interrupt is assigned automatically in accordance


with plug & play guidelines.
[Disabled] No PCI interrupt is used for the PCI module implemented.
[IRQ03 ...] The PCI interrupt is switched to the selected ISA interrupt.
2) Number of IRQ for PCI can be limited.
3) IRQ, memory- and DMA areas can be reserved for ISA cards.

Advanced > Advanced System Configuration

ISA Memory Gap: [Disabled]


PCI Bus Parity Checking: [Disabled
ECC CPU Parity Checking: [Disabled]
ECC Memory Parity Checking: [Disabled]

ACPI: [Disabled]
Graphics Aperture: [64MB]
USB Legacy Support: [Disabled] 1)

1) [Enabled] Bios recognises if a USB keyboard is plugged in.

4-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs CMOS-SETUP

Advanced > Power On/Off

Power Off Source


Software: [Disabled]
Keyboard: [Disabled]]
Power Button: [Enabled]
Power On Source
Chipcard: [Disabled]
Remote: [Disabled]
LAN: [Disabled]
Timer: [Disabled]
LAN Wakeup Mode
Monitor: [Off]

Advanced > System Management

Fan Control: [Auto]


Error Halt: [No Halt On Any Errors]

Fan State
CPU: OK
Power Supply: OK
Auxiliary: OK

Thermal Sensor State


CPU: OK
System: OK
Auxiliary: None

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-29


CMOS-SETUP SCENIC 6XX PCs

Security

Setup Password Not Installed


System Password Not Installed

Set Setup Password: [Press Enter]


Set Setup Password Lock: [Standard]
Set System Password: [Press Enter]
System Password Mode: [System]

System Load: [Standard]


Setup Prompt: [Enabled]
Virus Warning: [Disabled]

Diskette Write: [Enabled]


Flash Write: [Enabled]
Sicrypt PC-Look [Disabled]
Cabinet Monitoring [Disabled]

Power

APM [Disabled]
Power Management Mode: [Customized]

Standby Timeout: [Disabled]


Suspend Timeout: [Disabled]
Suspend Mode: [Suspend]
Hard Disk Timeout: [Disabled]

Resume On Time: [Off]


Resume Time: [00:00:00]

> Activity Detection

4-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SCENIC 6XX PCs CMOS-SETUP

Exit

Save Changes & Exit BIOS end, changes saved


Discard Changes & Exit BIOS end, changes not saved
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
Save Changes

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-31


CMOS-SETUP SCENIC 6XX PCs

4-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


V.24 PCI Multiport Card
8-channel V.24 multiport card: Material no.: 01750014684
16-channel V.24 multiport card: Material no.: 01750014685

The connections of these PCI cards are compatible to the ISA-versions


54148.00.1.09 (8-channel) and 54149.00.8.09 (16-channel).
The PCI cards occupy addresses and IRQ in accordance with the Plug & Play
specification.

Example: 16-channel V.24 PCI multiport card


The V.24 PCI multiport cards 01750014684/-85 do not have any jumpers.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-33


V.24 PCI Multiport Card

Operation of the Rocketport PCI card requires the latest driver releases which
you can find on the floppy supplied with the device or in the Intranet
(http://pdbh9a9a.pdb.siemens.de/webdatabase.nsf/framesets/frd0202?opendo
cument).
Other parameters may have to be set as well.
Starting with the following releases of the operating system, the update for
Rocketport PCI is included:

CSC-M/OS: 1.3/50
CSC-W32/OS: 1.1/20
CSC-O/OS: 1.2/40

If an older release of the operating system is used in the self-service system,


the driver has to be reloaded and the configuration may have to be adjusted.

i The new driver releases also support the ISA card.

4-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987)
This card replaces the EICON X25 card and is used for the data traffic via the
following ports:
− X.25
− ‘X.25 via the ISDN D channel’ (X.31 interface)

Item numbers incl. SW


The order numbers for the EICON HW/SW have changed as follows.

Previously New

EICON card/PC 89413.01.5.12 EICON card/C21 01750011989


package DOS package DOS, OSI

EICON card/PC 89412.01.8.12 EICON card/C21 01750011991


package OS/2 package OS/2, OSI

EICON card/PC 93921.01.5.12 EICON card/C21 01750011993


package SNA package OS/2, SNA

EICON card/C21 01750012166


package NT4.0
only Project SIBS 1)

EICON card/C21 01750018371


package NT

1) When the stock of 01750012166 is used up, SIBS will also get general
released version 01750018371. The cards are identical. SW has changed.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-35


Item numbers incl. SW EICON C21 (01750011987)

This card is delivered in two versions which differ only in the type of ISDN
connection. Version A requires the interface cable.
Version A is replaced by version B.

Version A Version B

1 14 LED 1
ISDN
LED
V.24

1 14

LED
V.24

DIN-4
Port

LED

4-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Card accessories

Card accessories

− Interface cable (1) for the connection of the ISDN cable with RJ 45
connector (version A only)
− Terminator (2)
Version (A):
This terminator (2) is not required for the standard ISDN connection in
Europe (see the supplier’s Installation Guide for more detail).

Version (B):
If a terminator is required (e.g. outside Europe), the card version has to be
determined. Cards with the board designation 800-129-01 (s. Print) have a
switchable terminator on the card, card 800-128-01 has an enclosed
terminator (2). For more details see the enclosed supplier’s Installation
Guide.
− ISDN cable
− Driver software

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-37


Required hardware resources EICON C21 (01750011987)

Required hardware resources


This plug-and-play card does not have switches or jumpers. All settings are
made via the software on the PC.

Overview of possible I/O addresses


I/O address Comment
200h
210h
220h
Ä
360h Standard
370h
380h Standard for CIP and ProPrint
390h
Ä
3E0h
3F0h
10h addresses are occupied.

4-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Interrupt setting

Interrupt setting
IRQ Comment
3
4
5 Standard
7
9
10
11
12
15

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-39


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

Installation

OSI gateway for DOS

(Copying the gateway SW from diskette to hard disk)


No plug and play utilities such as DWCFGMG.SYS are required. Install the
gateway software at the DOS level using the SETUP.EXE file on diskette 1.
Specify in which directory the SW is to be copied (specify the boot drive).
Answer with no when the setup software asks you whether you wish to install
X.PAD (OSI).
The same applies to the 802.2 protocol (SNA).

Ensure that the changes are written into a batch file, and, when
i exiting from the setup program, enter them manually in
AUTOEXEC.BAT before running NCPSTART.EXE.

Configuring
Select the ‘Communications Protocol Configuration’.

Press F4 for Config


Enter the following values:
Interface type Plug and Play
Number of cards 1
Card no. 1
Card type EC C21
Number of ports 1
Auto activate ports Yes
Auto detect No
IRQ 05
I/O port addr 380
Unique ID 000000FF
ISDN NO

4-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

Save the configuration with <F2 Save > and page with <F4 Config> to the
gateway settings.
Ask your network administrator for the values required for the setting. If an
executable installation already exist, you can print out the configuration and
then make the entries.
Save the setup py pressing <F2 Save> and quit by pressing <F10 Quit>.
Then edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as described above (also see the examples
in the appendix).
If settings are to be changed later, you can call the configuration program
ECCFG.EXE again.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-41


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

OS/2, OSI or SNA Gateway

Copy OSI or SNA Gateway SW from diskette to hard disk and configure:
Call Setup in the OS/2 window:
[A:\]SETUP
OSI:’X.25 Connect VxRy Installation Utility’ screen is displayed, or
SNA: ‘SNA Connect VxRy Installation Utility’ screen is displayed.
Accept the SW License Agreement with <Continue>.
“Install”
Select the CONFIG.SYS update.
Confirm the product number xxx-xxx-xx; Version xx.xx.xx; feature: xxxx with
<OK> and have it installed.
The ’Install-directories’ screen is displayed.
Select the Eicon Card / PC (EC/PC) or C21 with the spacebar in the ‘Select
the components that you want to install’ field.
Select the installation directory and confirm with <Install>.
The configuration program ECCFG.EXE is started automatically.
The ‘Gateway Configuration’ screen is displayed.
Confirm the configuration file EC.CFG and the installation directory with <F4
Config>.
‘Hardware Configuration’ screen is displayed.
It is recommended the following parameters be set for an X.25 connection:
Interface type Plug and Play
Number of cards 1
Card no. 1
Card type EC C21
Number of ports 1
Auto activate ports YES
Auto detect NO
IRQ level 05
I/O port addr. 380
Unique ID 000000FF
ISDN NO

4-42 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

Save the parameters with <F2 Save>.


Page with <F4 Config> to the gateway settings. Ask the network administrator
for the gateway settings.
Save with <F2 Save> and exit the ECCFG.EXE configuration program with
<F10 Quit>.
With SNA Connect, the SNA configuration program ECSNACFG.EXE is also
called automatically: The ‘Node Configuration’ screen is displayed. Page with
<F3 Add> to the protocol selection. Select the required protocol with the
function keys and then enter the parameters. Save with <F2 Save> and exit
from the screen with <F10 Cancel>.
Page back with <F10 Quit> and confirm ‘Exit to System’ with <F1 Confirm>.
A message appears, which indicates that the SW has been installed and that
CONFIG.SYS has been modified.
It is recommended that you reboot your PC.
During the reboot the message is displayed that the Eicon Card Driver
ECBIOS is being installed. ECCARD START is called. The program is linked
at the first start, the card is initialised, and the ports are activated.
If settings are to be changed later, the configuration program ECCFG.EXE or
ECSNACFG.EXE can be called again. The programs are in the BIN
subdirectory of the default directory (e. g. \EICON\BIN\ECCFG).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-43


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

Windows NT 4.0: Connection for Windows NT V4R2


Administrator rights are necessary for the installation of an Eicon card.
The Eicon card is installed by the network configuration of Windows NT.
Selection by menu: Start - Settings – Control Panel - Network
For an installation of X.25 or X.31, NT-Network support is not required.
The card is installed by the button <Network card - Add>.
− Selection of the network card: Floppy
− Specify the directory for the EICON CD in the window ‘Insert floppy’: e.g.
<CD-ROM-drive>:\
Select the card in the following window ’Select OEM option’:
EICON (S-Series, C-Series, Other).

The card can be installed automatically or manually. As the automatic


installation reads the PnP-Bios, this installation should be preferred for the C21
card.
If no PnP-Bios exists in the PC or if a EC/PC card is to be installed, manual
installation is preferable, since in this case the parameters can be defined
individually. Automatic installation will not result in the required settings.

4-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

Automatic installation
When the card is installed automatically, an attempt is made to detect the card
in the system and to define the hardware resources.
If the PC does have a PnP Bios, it is read. Manual installation should be used,
if automatic detection fails or if the card is to be provided with special
resources.

In the ’Installation’ mask, standard parameters are accepted by clicking <OK>:


Destination Directory: C:\EICON and Installation Group: EICON.

After this selection, Eicon Software prepares the installation and copies some
files to the hard drive.
The result of automatic detection is displayed in the ’Detection Results’ screen.
If parameters for IRQ and I/O-address are not stated, manual installation
should be used.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-45


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

The comments in the lower part of the display can be helpful in analysing
possible errors.

The screen is acknowledged with the <OK> button.


The ‘Configuration’ screen appears. How to proceed from here, is described in
the section ‘Configuration of WAN-Services’.

4-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

Manual installation

In the ’Installation’ screen standard parameters are adopted by clicking <OK>:


Destination Directory: C:\EICON and Installation Group: EICON.

After this selection Eicon Software prepares the installation and copies some
files to the hard drive.

The card which is about to be installed has to be selected in the ‘Adapter


Properties’ mask,in this example the EC/PC card. If the button <Detect> is
pressed, automatic detection of the card starts.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-47


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

By selection of the register card ‘Settings’, the desired hardware resources can
be set, e.g. the EC/PC card. The parameters which are to be set can be found
in the configuration settings.

4-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

The mask is acknowledged with the button <OK>.


The mask ‘Configuration’ appears. How to proceed from here is described in
the section ‘Configuration of WAN-Services’.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-49


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

Configuration of the WAN Services


The following mask ‘WAN Services Install’ is displayed. The Eicon card and
the protocols can be configured by acknowledging with <Yes>.

Specified sections can be selected inside the directory structure. The


dependent data is displayed on the right side and can also be changed there.
The parameters are saved by calling the function ‘File-Save’.
Ask your network administrator for the parameters for protocol
i configuration.
The protocol configuration of the card can be saved by the function
‘File – Export’ and read again by the function ‘File-Import’. This way, a
once set configuration can be set on other systems. Hardware settings
of the card like I/O address, IRQ, etc. are not overwritten.

4-50 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Installation

After leaving the program by means of the function ’File – Exit’, the program
will be closed. If the parameters were not saved, there will be an additional
request.
Answer the following query as to whether ‘Eicon Wan Services’ are to be
installed with ‘No’.
Installation and configuration are completed. The network installation window
can be closed by clicking the <Close > button. When leaving this mask,
Windows NT always tries to update WinSock from 1.1 to 2.0. As Winsockets
are not installed, this function will always fail and can be confirmed by clicking
the button <OK>.
After installation the computer has to be restarted.
The faultless function of the card can be checked with the program ‘ECCARD
STATUS’.
EiconCard Management Utility
Copyright (C) Eicon Technology Corporation 1993-1997. All Rights
Reserved.
EiconCard Configuration :
Card Type ID Status PCB IO Port IRQ Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C21 6154C040 LOADED 800268.1 360 5 n/a
EiconCard Port mapping :
Card Port Port name Protocol
-------------------------------------
1 01 P1 X25
EiconCard Memory status :
Card Type Free Total
-------------------------------------
1 C21 293 K 512 K
Command completed successfully.

Status LOADED indicates, that the card could be started without errors.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-51


Installation EICON C21 (01750011987)

Following setting has to be made in the Bios of the PC: PnP OS = NO.
i
The installation described above can only take place if administrator or
comparable rights exists.
After a complete NT-Installation it is recommended to play in the
service pack 3.
If it is necessary to change the hardware parameters of the card (e.g.
IRQ or I/O-address), the only possible way is:
Start - Settings – Control Panel - Network – Network Card - EiconCard
xxx - Feature.
The parameters of an automatic C21 card installation in a PC with
PnP-Bios should not be changed.

4-52 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Testing the card with ECTEST

Testing the card with ECTEST


Enter: ecbios start /readport any
ectest /force /show
Output e. g.:
EiconCard Self-Test Utility
ECTEST x.xx Rev. xx
Copyright (c) Eicon Technology Corporation 1996. All Rights Reserved.
-------------------------
Card #1: C21
CARD CONFIGURATION:
I/O Port Address : 380
Interrupt Request Level : 5
Memory size : 512 K
CARD DIAGNOSTIC:
EC<->HOST INTERFACE
First 4K Memory test : Passed
FPGA Registers test : Passed
Memory test
CPU->EC Memory test : Passed
Concurrent Memory Access test : Passed
HOST->EC Interrupt test : Passed
EC->HOST Interrupt test : Passed
ISDN S/T INTERFACE
S/T Registers Access test : Passed
ISDN S/T Interrupt test : Passed
CPU<=>SCC Loopback test : Passed
CPU<=>ISDN S/T Transceiver Loopback test : Passed
EiconCard C21, Diagnostic: Passed
-------------------------
DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY:

Card #1: Success.

-------------------------

Under OS/2, the module ECBIOS.SYS is started in the


i CONFIG.SYS.
The output can differ for the various operating systems.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-53


Technical data EICON C21 (01750011987)

Technical data
PC bus: ISA
Data encoding: NRZ, NRZI, FM
Transmission rate: max. 64 Kbps (V.24, NRZ)
External interfaces: V.24 (RS-232-C) via 25-pin D-Sub
connector
ISDN via DIN 4 connector
Voltage requirement: +5V current consumption 1.5 A
+ 12 V current consumption 50 mA
- 12 V current consumption 50 mA
Voltage tolerance: ±5%
Ambient conditions Temperature: 0 OC to 50 OC
(operation): Rel. humidity: 0 to 90 % (non-condensing)

4-54 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Pin assignment

Pin assignment

V.24 interface connector


Pin Signal Description Direction
1 PGND Protective Ground Common
2 TXD Transmit Data Output
3 RXD Receive Data Input
4 RTS Request to Send Output
5 CTS Clear to Send Input
6 DSR Data Set Ready Input
7 SGND Signal Ground Common
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 TCLK Transmit Clock (DCE) Input
16
17 RCLK Receive Clock Input
18 TEST Local Loopback Aviation Output
19
20 DTR Data Transmit Ready Output
21 RLB Remote Loopback Output
22 RI Ring Indicator Input
23
24 DTECLK Transmit Clock (DTE) Output
25 TI Test Indicator Input

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-55


Appendix EICON C21 (01750011987)

Appendix

Example for DOS


Under DOS, identical configurations can be used for the EC/PC and C21
cards. The two cards are only distinguished by the settings in the EC:CFG file.

Example: OSI Gateway (depending on the above directory


entry)
REM Eicon statement begin
C:
CD C:\OSIGATE
ECBIOS START /READPORT ANY
ECCARD START
REM Eicon statement end

Examples for OS/2


Example 1: X.25 Connect for OS/2 (OSI Gateway)
CONFIG.SYS for C21
LIBPATH=C:\EICON\DLL;...
SET PATH=C:\EICON\BIN;...
SET DPATH=C:\EICON\BIN;C:\EICON\CONFIG;C:\EICON\DLL;...

REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements Start *******


SET CONFIG=C:\EICON\BIN;
DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS PNP
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements End *******

The EC/PC has to be started without the parameter PnP, otherwise a


i manual entry is required to acknowledge a faulty configuration.

4-56 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Appendix

STARTUP.CMD
@ECHO OFF
CALL C:\EICON\BIN\X25CONN
EXIT
X25CONN.CMD
REM EICON statements begin
C:
CD C:\EICON\BIN
ECCARD START
REM Eicon statements end

Example 2: SNA Connect for OS/2 (SNA Gateway)


CONFIG.SYS for C21
LIBPATH=C:\EICON\DLL;...
SET PATH=C:\EICON\BIN;...
SET DPATH=C:\EICON\BIN;C:\EICON\CONFIG;C:\EICON\DLL;...

REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements Start *******


SET CONFIG=C:\EICON\BIN;
DEVICE=C:\EICON\BIN\ECBIOS.SYS PNP
REM ******* Eicon Technology Corporation statements End *******

The EC/PC has to be started without the parameter PnP, otherwise a


i manual entry is required to acknowledge a faulty configuration.

STARTUP.CMD
@ECHO OFF
CALL C:\EICON\BIN\SNACONN
EXIT

SNACONN.CMD for C21


REM EICON statements begin
C:
CD C:\EICON\BIN
ECCARD START
ECSNA START /P 1 /N NODE1
REM Eicon statements end

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-57


Appendix EICON C21 (01750011987)

Replace the term “node” with the generated terms in the SNACFG
i (e. g.: ECSAN START /P 1 /N Primary).
Example for an EC.CFG file for an X.31 connection (D channel)

C:\EICON\EC.CFG Fri Apr 18 10:13:27

Gateway Configuration Version 3 Revision 05.04

_______________________________________________________________[1]
Hardware Configuration

Interface type ...............Plug and Play


Number of cards .............................................1

Card number 1

Card type EC C21


Option module ISDN
Number of ports 1
Auto activate ports YES
Auto detect NO
I/O port addr 380
Unique ID 000000FF
ISDN YES
ISDN switch type EURO

_______________________________________________________________[2]
Protocol Configuration Card 1

OSI Gateway

Line protocol module .............................X.25


Dialer selection..................................SIG.+X25

______________________________________________________________[3]
Sync Driver Configuration Port 1 Card 1

Port name ...................................


Port number........................................01
Leased/Dial line interface : ..................DIAL
Duplex : ........................................FULL
Point-to-point/Multi-point ............POINT-TO-POINT

4-58 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EICON C21 (01750011987) Appendix

Modem interface ................................RS232


Clocking : ..................................EXTERNAL
Data encoding : ..................................NRZ
DCD (off) -> RTS (on) delay (msec) ...............0000
CTS (off) -> CTS (on) delay (msec) ...............0000
RTS (on) -> RTS (off) maximum (msec) ............0000
DCD (on) -> DCD (off) maximum (msec) ............0000

_____________________________________________________________[4]
D Channel Configuration Port 1 Card 1

Static TEI ........................................01

_____________________________________________________________[5]
.25 Configuration Port 1 Card 1

Node type .....................................DTE


Node address ...........................
Basic/extended format packets ...............BASIC
Sequential assignment of virtual circuits ..............YES
Maximum window size ....002 Maximum packet size ..0128
Default window size ....002 Default packet size ..0128
Number of PVCs .........001
Number of IVCs .........000
Number of TVCs .........001
Number of OVCs .........000
Timer T20 (sec) ........180 Timer T21 (sec) .......200
Timer T22 (sec) ........180 Timer T23 (sec) .......180
Idle timer (sec) .......000 Ack. timer (msec) ....0010
Maximum retry count N3 ..................................03
HDLC or SDLC : ........................................HDLC

X25 Version ...........1984 TOA/NPI addressing .....

#PVC Window Size Packet Size #PVC Window Size Packet Size
001 002 0128

A PVC always has to be generated, even if there is only one SVC


i connection.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-59


Appendix EICON C21 (01750011987)

Known interdependencies when converting to the new Eicon software:

DOS:
The following products or modules have to be installed:
Product: SNA-LU0 Release 2.1/08
Product: NCEC-Trace:
NCEC_CHK.EXE 71.346 05.02.97 $MOD 950303 V01.07
NCEC_BUF.EXE 4.706 05.02.97 $MOD 970205 V01.08
NCEC_TRC.EXE 20.741 05.02.97 $MOD 970205 V01.08

OS/2:
If necessary, change the products that access the Eicon DLLs, since the
structure of the DLLs has changed.

Configuration files (EC.CFG and SNA.CFG)


The structure of the configuration files has changed; therefore the tools that
write directly to the files have to be adapted.
Windows NT:
Connection for Windows NT V4R2 is only planned for use with Windows NT
4.0 including service pack 3. Software for Windows NT 3.51 is not provided.
The version ‘Connection for Windows NT V4R2’ is delivered by Wincor Nixdorf
GmbH & Co. KG including the patch ECNB.SYS 23.07.98 4.2 (Build 88).
Without this patch, the EC/PC card cannot be operated in fast Pentium
computers.
The software layers of Eicon software have changed, not the API. Therefore, it
might be necessary to get the application updated. Fault indication: The
application stops at x25init.
As an environment for development, the following product is suggested: Eicon
Development Suite of July 1997 or later
(Eicon number: 714-079-01).

4-60 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30
01750012715
This card replaces the type Smart 16/4 AT (90695.01.4.09). The card contains
a new chip set requiring new driver software which is downward compatible for
all Smart 16/4 AT cards.
Delivery package:
− Smart 16/4 AT Plus Ringnode card
− Set of ‘LAN Support Software‘ diskettes

Switch position

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-61


Hardware settings Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715

Hardware settings

Factory defaults

Switch Parameter settings (all switches off)


Switch 1 and 2 I/O addresses and memory addresses (Smartrom)
(0A20 - 0A2F, CC000 - CDFFF)
Switch 3 Smartrom deactivated
Switch 4 4 Mbps transmission speed

Overview of possible settings


Switch 1 Switch 2 I/O Smartrom Comment
addresses addresses
off off 0A20 - 0A2F CC000 - CDFFF Standard
on off 1A20 - 1A2F DC000 - DDFFF
off on 2A20 - 2A2F CE000 - CFFFF
on on 3A20 - 3A2F DE000 - DFFFF

Switch 3 Smartrom socket Comment


off Deactivated Standard
on Activated

Switch 4 Transmission speed Comment


off 4Mbps Network dependent
on 16Mbps Network dependent

The hardware settings of the card can be overwritten or selected from the ‘LAN
Support Software’ configuration program.

4-62 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715 Configuration program

Configuration program
1. Insert diskette 1 of the LAN Support Software diskette set and ‘boot’ the
system as usual.
2. Press F1 to call the diagnostic menu and to output the current
parameters.
3. Press F2 to start the TRCFGC.EXE program.

The adapter which has been found is indicated, and the I/O address has to
be confirmed with Return.
Following this, the complete existing configuration is displayed and the
settings can be changed if required.
Example
Existing Configuration :-

Software configuration settings Adapter switch settings


------------------------------- -----------------------
A. I/O ADDRESS = 0A20 I/O ADDRESS = 0A20
B. SMARTROM = DISABLED SMARTROM = DISABLED
C. RING SPEED = 4Mbps RING SPEED = 4Mbps
D. INT CHANNEL = 5
E. DMA CHANNEL = 6 (ENABLED)
F. BUS TIMING = NORMAL
G. BUS MODE = ASYNCHRONOUS
H. I/O WIDTH = 16 BITS
INTERRUPTS = EDGE TRIGGERED

M. to force the configuration to Match the ADAPTER switches


R. to Restore the factory defaults
Q. to Quit and (optionally) update the configuration

Enter the letter corresponding to the parameter you wish to change

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-63


Configuring the card Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715

Configuring the card


The card can also be configured using the TRCFGC.EXE program, which is
located in the main directory of the first diskette.

Use the following command structure for input:

TRCFGC <command-line options>

Each command line must begin with the TRCFGC command followed by
/IO=<I/O address>, which specifies the I/O address of the Token Ring card
to be configured. (The I/O address must always be defined).

Example:

TRCFGC /IO=0A20 /8_BIT

This entry defines the address 0A20 and operating mode 8-bit.
It is also possible to specify several selections simultaneously in a command
line.

Sample configuration of the Smart 16/4 AT Plus Ringnode card in the self-
service sector:

TRCFGC /IO=0A20 /DMA=6 /INT=5 /NORMAL /ASYNCH /16_Bit


/ROM_Disable /4MBITS /NOMORE

Error level of TRCFGC.EXE program


1 Successful
2 General error
3 Adapter card cannot be found at specified I/O address, or the switch
does not match the specified configuration.

4-64 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715 Configuring the card

Command table

Optional Description
commands
/IO=<hhhh> <hhhh> is the hexadecimal I/O address of the
Token Ring card to be configured
/DMA=<n> <n> is the DMA channel on which the Token Ring card is
to be operated. Valid entries: 0, 3, 5 and 6. If the value is
0, the DMA is deactivated and PIO mode is selected..
/INT=<nn> <nn> is the interrupt request channel (IRQ) to be used
for the Token Ring card.
Valid entries: 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12 and 15.
/NORMAL Sets the clock frequency of the bus system to ‘normal’.
/OTHER Sets the clock frequency of the bus system to ‘other’.
/ASYNCH Selects asynchronous bus mode.
/SYNCH Selects synchronous bus mode.
/8_BIT Uses 8-bit I/O transmission.
/16_BIT Uses 16-bit I/O transmission .
/FACTORYDEF Resets the software configuration to the factory defaults
(apart from the transmission speed).
/NOMORE Deactivates the ‘screen paging’ function.
/READCONFIG Displays the current configuration of the Token Ring card
in read-only mode
/ENABLE Queries the switch positions of switches 1 through 4 and
transfers them to the current configuration.
/NEWIO=<hhhh> <hhhh> is the hexadecimal I/O address with which the
Token Ring card is to be used.
/ROM-ENABLE Smartrom activated.
/ROM-DISABLE Smartrom deactivated.
/4MBITS Selects a transmission speed of 4 Mbps.
/16MBITS Selects a transmission speed of 16 Mbps.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-65


Software switches Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715

Software switches
I/O address ROM Comment
0A20 CC000 Standard
1A20 DC000
2A20 CE000
3A20 DE000

DMA channel Comment


0 (PIO)
3
5
6 Standard

INT channel Comment


2
3
5 Standard
7
10
11
12
15

Ring speed Comment


16 Mbits Network dependent
4 Mbits Network dependent

I/O width Comment


16 Bits Standard
8 Bits

4-66 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715 Software switches

Bus Timing Comment


NORMAL Standard
OTHER

Bus mode Comment


SYNC
ASYNC Standard

Smartrom Comment
ENABLED
DISABLED Standard

If implemented in conjunction with the SAS-DUE adapter, the SAS-


i DUE adapter must be configured to I/O address 260h. In addition, the
drivers for this card must be assigned the corresponding parameters.

If implemented in CIP V0, the setting on the motherboard must be


changed to I/O address 260h. In order to use this setting, the driver
NCV24MX.SYS in CONFIG.SYS must be assigned the parameter
A1.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-67


SMARTLSP.EXE driver Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715

SMARTLSP.EXE driver
Madge Token Ring cards are used in the self-service sector in conjunction with
the SMARTLSP.EXE driver. This driver supports the LLC and NETBIOS
interface. In the new release 5.0 (2), this driver must be created from the
individual components before installation. To this end, the batch processing file
SMARTLSP.BAT is contained in the SMART directory on the third diskette.
The driver is downward compatible and runs on all Smart 16/4 AT cards.

Creating the SMARTLSP.EXE driver

First option:
1. Deactivate write protection on the first diskette or use a backup copy.
2. Start the batch processing file on drive A: in the SMART directory as
follows:

Input: SMARTLSP.BAT A:\SMART C:\DRIVER

The SMARTLSP.EXE driver is created on drive C: in the DRIVER directory.

Any existing SMARTLSP.EXE driver is not overwritten.

4-68 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715 SMARTLSP.EXE driver

Second option:
Create the SMARTLSP.EXE driver using a batch processing file from the
customer installation program.

rem Set source drive


set smt_path=a:\smart\
rem Set target drive
set lsp_path=c:\driver\
echo linking from %smt_path% to %lsp_path%
%smt_path%smtlink %lsp_path%smartlsp.exe
%smt_path%smart.exe %lsp_path%lsp&lpx.cfg
%smt_path%llc.smt %smt_path%netb.smt

del smtlink.tmp

Any existing SMARTLSP.EXE driver is not overwritten.


The SMART.EXE driver is created from the following components:
LLC.SMT
LSP&IPX.CFG
NETB.SMT
SMART.EXE
SMTLINK.EXE
The LSP&IPX.CFG configuration file must not be modified.
i

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-69


SMARTLSP.EXE driver Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30 01750012715

4-70 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Ethernet 3C905B TX 01750019090

Introduction
The PCI Ethernet card 3C905B TX (No.: 01750019090) of 3Com is equipped
with a RJ-45 connector and is suitable for the operation with unshielded,
twisted cables.

TX
RJ-45 port 1

TX

ACT LED ACT


10 LNK LED L 10
N
100 LNK LED K 100

Delivery package: Card


2 driver disks EtherDisk XL

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-71


Introduction Ethernet 3C905B TX 01750019090

The card operates automatically with a data transmission rate of 10 Mbps, if


the link is made to a 10BASE-T Hub, or with 100 Mbps, if the link is made to a
100BASE-TX/T4 Hub.

The card has 3 light-emitting diodes to display the operating status with the
following meaning:

LED Description Flashing Continuous Off


light

10 LNK green: not possible good no connection


trouble free connection card/hub
connection card/hub
100 green: not possible good no connection
LNK trouble free connection card/hub
connection card/hub
ACT yellow: Data traffic intensive data no data traffic
data traffic traffic
with 10 or
100Mbps

4-72 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Ethernet 3C905B TX 01750019090 DOS configuration program

DOS configuration program


1. Make sure that the card is connected to the network.
2. Boot the PC under DOS.

The configuration and diagnostic program does not run if the memory
manager or other device drivers are loaded.

3. Insert the EtherDisk disk into drive A and enter the following command:

a:install [Enter]

4. In the displayed menu select Configuration and Diagnostic Program and


confirm by pressing the key [ Enter ].

In the pull-down menu Install choose the option Configure Adapter and
confirm by pressing the key [ Enter ].

Then a picture with the parameter settings of the network card is


displayed.

5. Press the key [ tab ], to get to the main dialog box. Use the arrow keys for
the selection of an option and confirm with the key [ Enter ].

A second dialog box is displayed.

6. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the lists of configuration items in the
selected option.
Choose the setting for the selected option and confirm with the key
[ Enter ].

7. Continue the procedure for each option.

Use the online help for more information on the individual settings.
Press the key [ F1 ] when you have selected an option.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-73


Adjustment of the card Ethernet 3C905B TX 01750019090

Adjustment of the card


The card is to be adjusted as follows. The card is also shipped with this
setting.
Option Default Remark
Optimise network driver Normal
Full Duplex Auto select
Boot PROM Disabled
Media Type Auto select
I/O Port Address F400H (PCI) Not adjustable
Interrupt Level X (PCI) Not adjustable

Full duplex with 100 Mbps uses the efficiency of switched node connections.
The 3C905-TX network card supports the full duplex operation with 10 or
100 Mbps. If the node switch supports the NWAY and full duplex
characteristics, the card will run automatically in full duplex operating mode.
The setting is saved in the card by clicking the menu item "OK".
The function of the card can be checked afterwards by selecting the menu item
"test".
For further information refer to the 3Com World Wide Web page
FAQ at http://www.3Com.com.

4-74 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-V Adapter 0175001284
The DU78-V adapter is an ISA board which can be used in standard PCs with
ISA or EISA bus. The bus interface is compatible with the ISA Standard AT
bus in accordance with IEEE-P996. The presence of other PC busses such as
a PCI or VL bus is irrelevant for the use of this adapter.
The board has an integrated data transfer interface which provides
synchronous and asynchronous point-to-point and multipoint connections via
various physical interfaces. The data transfer function is software compatible
with the data transfer section of all D663 and DU78 versions.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-75


Setting DU78-V Adapter 0175001284

Setting
The DT adapter DU78-V is configured via jumpers. The function of the jumpers
is printed on the board.
The following diagram shows the position of the jumpers and of the submodule
on the board:

I/O-ADDRESS RECEIVE TRANSMIT INTERRUPT REQUEST


DMA-CHANNEL DMA-CHANNEL IRQ-
S1 S 0 1 3 0 1 3 10 11 12 15

X9 X7 X6 X8

DT submodule

DT conn.
25 pins

I/O address
The jumpers S0 and S1 determine the I/O addresses, which the board
occupies in the address range of the ISA bus. All 16 address bits of the ISA I/O
area are decoded. The selection of the addresses by the jumpers is binary
coded.

4-76 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-V Adapter 0175001284 Setting

The following table shows the meaning of the jumper placement:

I/O address Jumper Comment


(hex) S1 S0
0220-0227, 022E placed placed
0260-0267, 026E placed open Standard
02A0-02A7, 02AE open placed
02E0-02E7, 02EE open open

DMA selection
On the AT bus the DMA channels 0, 1 and 3 are available for free selection.
The board supports a full-duplex data transfer, since for transmitting or
receiving a separate DMA channel can be selected. By placing the
corresponding jumper, the transmit or receive DMA channel is selected.
In principle, the combination of the DMA channels is free. The software and
the prioritisation of the DMA channels of the ISA bus permit the following
combinations:

DMA Channel
Receive Transmit
0
0 1
3
1 1
3
3 3

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-77


Setting DU78-V Adapter 0175001284

Per DMA channel only one receive or transmit channel can be


i selected.
If only one DMA channel is needed for transmitting and receiving, only
one bridge needs to be placed on the transmit or receive DMA
channel. However, both can be placed if they occupy the same DMA
channel.

Interrupt choice
The interrupt choice is directly determined by the placed interrupt channel.
Following interrupt lines can be placed:
− IRQ10,
− IRQ11,
− IRQ12,
− IRQ15

Please note that in PCs with PS/2 mouse, the mouse occupies the IRQ12.
Only one interrupt channel can be used.
i

4-78 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-V Adapter 0175001284 Setting

Default setting
The illustration below shows the default setting of the jumpers:

Standard setting: I/O addresses - 0260h-0267h, 026Eh


DT interrupt - IRQ 15
Receive DMA channel -0
Transmit DMA channel -1

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-79


Interface DU78-V Adapter 0175001284

Interface

Signal assignment universal DT interface


The signal assignment and the line physics of the universal DT interface
depends on the attached DT submodule. Submodules are available for IHSS,
V.24 and V.11 lines.
The figure below shows the 25-pin DSUB DT plug with its pin assignment on
the screen of the board:
1 13
Pins

14 25

For more details please refer to the documentation of the interfaces.

4-80 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-
25516
The DU78-Va adapter is a ISA board, which is software-compatible in the DT
function for the DT section of all DU78 variants. In contrast to the DU78-V
adapter, this adapter can be adjusted to IRQ5.
If IRQ5 is to be used, a current driver with adjustable IRQ5 parameter must be
used in addition.
The DU78-Vb adapter is fully compatible with the DU78-Va adapter. It was
especially developed for the system units P6XX which require smaller
dimensions.

Setting
The DT adapter DU78-V is configured via jumpers. The function of the jumpers
is printed on the board.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-81


Setting DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516

The following diagram shows the position of the jumpers and of the submodule
on the board:

I/O-ADDRESS RECEIVE TRANSMIT INTERRUPT REQUEST


DMA-CHANNEL DMA-CHANNEL IRQ-
S1 S 0 1 3 0 1 3 5 10 11 12 15

X9 X7 X6 X8

DT submodule

DT conn.
25 pins

4-82 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516 Setting

I/O address
The jumpers S0 and S1 determine the I/O addresses, which the board
occupies in the address range of the ISA bus. All 16 address bits of the ISA I/O
area are decoded. The selection of the addresses by the jumpers is binary
coded.
The following table shows the meaning of the jumper placement:

I/O address Jumper Comment


(hex) S1 S0
0220-0227, 022E placed placed
0260-0267, 026E placed open standard
02A0-02A7, 02AE open placed
02E0-02E7, 02EE open open

DMA selection
On the AT bus the DMA channels 0, 1 and 3 are available for free selection.
The board supports a full-duplex data transfer, since for transmitting or
receiving a separate DMA channel can be selected. By placing the
corresponding jumper, the transmit or receive DMA channel is selected.
In principle, the combination of the DMA channels is free. The software and
the prioritisation of the DMA channels of the ISA bus permit the following
combinations:

DMA Channel
Receive Transmit
0
0 1
3
1 1
3
3 3

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-83


Setting DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516

Per DMA channel only one receive or transmit channel can be


i selected.
If only one DMA channel is needed for transmitting and receiving, only
one bridge needs to be placed on the transmit or receive DMA
channel. However, both can be placed if they occupy the same DMA
channel.

Interrupt choice
The interrupt choice is directly determined by the placed interrupt channel.
Following interrupt lines can be placed:
− IRQ 5
− IRQ10
− IRQ11
− IRQ12
− IRQ15

Please note that in PCs with PS/2 mouse, the mouse occupies the IRQ12.
Only one interrupt channel can be used.
i

4-84 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516 Interface

Setting example

I/O-ADDRESS RECEIVE TRANSMIT INTERRUPT REQUEST


DMA-CHANNEL DMA-CHANNEL IRQ-
S1 S0 0 1 3 0 1 3 5 10 11 12 15

X9 X7 X6 X8

Setting example: I/O address - 0220h-0227h, 022Eh


Receive DMA channel -0
Transmit DMA channel -1
DT interrupt - IRQ 15

Interface

Signal assignment universal DT interface


The signal assignment and the line physics of the universal DT interface
depends on the attached DT submodule. Submodules are available for IHSS,
V.24 and V.11 lines.
The figure below shows the 25pin DSUB DT plug with its pin assignment on
the screen of the board:
1 13
Pins

14 25

For more details please refer to the documentation of the interfaces.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-85


Interface DU78-Va/b Adapter 01750007738/-25516

4-86 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Audio Card TT SOLO 01750022769

Technical data
Amplifier: Stereo amplifier 2 x 50 mW
Driver: MS-DOS 7.0, Windows 95/98, WindowsNT 4.0
System requirements: PCI slot

Connections and jumper settings

Connection audio-
JP1: Line OUT cable CD-ROM
(Connection amplifier)

Speaker OUT/
Line OUT
JP1: Speaker OUT
(Connection loudspeaker)
Line IN

Micro IN

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-87


Technical data Audio Card TT SOLO 01750022769

4-88 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP
Material number: 01750023889

Delivery package: Dotcard-690 AGP


Driver disc for Windows 9X, NT 4.0
Driver disc for OS/2 3.0 / 4.0

Introduction
The Dotcard-690 AGP is a AGP 1x graphics card for the operation of flat
displays of different technologies and analogue monitors. The card is fully
compatible with the VGA standard and can be used in every commercial
computer system with an AGP card slot.
This manual is only valid for the board revision A of the Dotcard-690 AGP.

Resources
I/O area: 3B0h - 3BBh and 3C0h - 3DCh
Memory: A0000h - BFFFFh
BIOS: C0000h - CAFFFh

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-89


DIP switches, connectors and jumpers Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

DIP switches, connectors and jumpers


R117

F1
F2
1
1

JP9
16
10
5
X9

X2
11
1
6

S2
OFF
OFF 123456
12345 6 ON
ON S1
1
36
35
18
17

JP11 JP4
JP12
1
X8

JP19
1
20
19
2

JP5

1 1

4-90 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP Description of connectors

Description of connectors

Connector X8: External PanelLink


This 36-pin female connector is used for the connection of the Dotcard LVPL
receiver. Displays with integrated PanelLink receiver can also be connected.

Connector X9: Connection for analogue monitor


Commercial Multisync monitors can be connected to this 15-pin D-SUB female
connector.
With most of the flat display technologies supported by the Dotcard-690 AGP,
a simultaneous operation of monitor and flat display is possible.
The Dotcard-690 AGP always operates in simultaneous mode, regardless of
whether a monitor is connected or not.

Connector X2: Connection for separate 12 V supply


The Dotcard-690 AGP can be connected directly with the PC power supply by
means of this 4-pin connector.
Its design and pin assignment is the same as that of the voltage supply
connectors of 3.5" drives.
Separate voltage supply via this connector is only necessary if the display and
the Blacklightinverter take more than 1 A current. The max. current load of the
connector is 3 A.
Note the setting of jumper JP9!

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-91


Jumper settings Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

Jumper settings

JP4: BIOS access


This jumper no longer exists on cards released starting November 1999.

Attention: Do not make modifications to the setting

Jumper setting Function


The card is equipped with a 44-KB Standard
BIOS. setting

May be used only when equipped with a


32-KB BIOS.

JP5: DISPON Polarity

Jumper setting Function


The polarity of the signal DIPON is
3 2 1 active low.

The polarity of the signal DIPON is Standard


3 2 1 active high. setting

4-92 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP Jumper settings

JP9: 12 V power supply

Jumper setting Function


The Dotcard 690 AGP is supplied with Standard
12 V via the AGP bus. Adjustment for setting
1 2 3 display configurations, which need less
than 1 A.
The Dotcard 690 AGP is supplied via *
the plug X2 with 12 V. Setting for
1 2 3 display configurations, which need less
than 1 A.

* 15“ XGA TFT Samsung (01750020296)


10.4“ VGA TFT Emco (01750025012) High Brightness
10.4“ SVGA TFT Palomar (017500xxxxx) High Brightness

JP11 and JP12: Display CLK source

Jumper setting Use


JP11 For all TFT displays. Standard
1 2 3 setting
JP12
3 2 1
JP11 For all 24-bit colour STN and TFT
1 2 3 displays.
JP12
3 2 1
JP11 For all 16-bit colour STN.
1 2 3
JP12
3 2 1

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-93


Potentiometer R117 Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

JP19: 3.3 V Core voltage

Jumper setting Function


The core voltage for the Dotcard 690 Standard
AGP is produced by a controller on the setting
1 2 3 card
The 3.3 V core voltage is taken from the
AGP bus .
1 2 3

Potentiometer R117

Adjusting the PanelLink signal peak


With this potentiometer the signal peak of the differential output signals at
connector X8 can be adjusted. The pre-set value is approx. 240 mV.
The setting depends on the display used and the length of the transmission
link. Please adjust the signal peak by turning the potentiometer slowly to the
right or to the left, until the display no longer shows any pixel malfunctions.

4-94 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP Setting the DIP switches

Setting the DIP switches

1 2 3 4 5 6 ON
OFF

S1: Selection of display


The following tables (table 1 and table 2) apply to BIOS version 1.0.6-P-01-01
or higher.
Panel ID # Display Type S1.5 S1.4 S1.3 S1.2
1 Not implemented
ON ON ON ON
2 XGA TFT; 1024 x 768; 18 Bit; with OFF
integrated PanelLink interface ON ON ON
3 VGA colour STN; 640 x 480; 16 Bit OFF
ON ON ON
4 XGA colour STN; 1024 x 768; 24 Bit OFF OFF
ON ON
5 SVGA colour STN; 800 x 600; 16 Bit OFF
ON ON ON
6 VGA TFT; 640 x 480; 18 or 24 Bit OFF OFF
ON ON
7 XGA TFT; 1024 x 768; 18 Bit; OFF OFF
2 Pixel/SHFCLK ON ON
8 SVGA TFT; 800 x 600; 18 or 24 Bit OFF OFF OFF
ON
Table 1

The shaded line marks the standard setting at the time of delivery.
The DIP switches S1.1 and S1.6 are reserved and must always be set to the
factory default OFF.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-95


Setting the DIP switches Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

Panel ID # Display name


1
2 15“ XGA TFT Samsung (01750020296)
3
4
5
6 10.4“ VGA TFT Toshiba (01750018806) Standard
setting
10.4“ VGA TFT Emco High Brightness
(01750025012)
7
8 10.4“ SVGA TFT Toshiba (01750011277)
10.4“ SVGA TFT Emco High Brightness
(0175002xxxx)
12.1“ SVGA TFT Toshiba (01750019261)

Table 2

4-96 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP Setting the DIP switches

S2: PanelLink configuration


Switch # Function
S2.1 ON Display data P[0:23] is taken over on the falling CLK
edge (standard setting).
OFF Display data P[0:23] is taken over on the rising CLK
edge.
S2.2 ON DE and control signals are taken over on the falling
CLK edge (standard setting).
OFF DE and control signals are taken over on the rising
CLK edge.
S2.3 Do not modify this switch. Keep the standard setting OFF.
ON
OFF (Standard setting)
S2.4 ON Input voltage is 3.3 V.
OFF Input voltage is 5 V (standard setting).

S2.5 ON The transmitter synchronises on phase 2 (for Panel


ID #8).
OFF The transmitter synchronises on phase 1 (for Panel
ID #2 and #6).
(Standard setting)
S2.6 ON The transmitter is in power down mode (only for
testing!).
OFF Normal operation (standard setting)

Table 3

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-97


Fuse Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

Fuse
Fuse Protected voltage Type
F1 + 12 V Display 3 A, fast, 125 V, version Picofuse
F2 + VDD Display 3 A, fast, 125 V, version Picofuse

Pin assignment

Connector X9

Pin Signal name


1 Red
2 Green
3 Blue
4 N.C.
5 GND
6 Red GND
7 Green GND
8 Blue GND
9 reserved
10 GND
11 N.C.
12 reserved
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 reserved

Connector X2

Pin Signal name Description


1 N.C. not used
2 GND
3 GND
4 + 12 V 12 V display power supply

4-98 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP Pin assignment

Connector X8

Pin Signal name Description


1 TxC+ Strobe line, differential (positive)
2 GND
3 TxC- Strobe line, differential (negative)
4 GND
5 Tx0- Date line 0, differential (negative)
6 GND
7 Tx0+ Date line 0, differential (positive)
8 GND
9 Tx1- Date line 1, differential (negative)
10 GND
11 Tx1+ Date line 1, differential (positive)
12 GND
13 Tx2- Date line 2, differentially (negative)
14 GND
15 Tx2+ Date line 2, differentially (positive)
16 GND
17 VDISP Display voltage (5 V or 3.3 V), switchable
18 GND
19 GND
20 V0 Positive control voltage
21 GND
22 VDISP Display voltage (5 V or 3.3 V), switchable
23 GND
24 RESRVD reserved
25 GND
26 RESRVD reserved
27 GND
28 DISPON Switching signal, high active
29 GND
30 VDISP Display voltage (5 V or 3.3 V), switchable
31 GND
32 + 12 V Power supply for the receiver, switchable
33 GND
34 + 12 V Power supply for the receiver, switchable
35 GND
36 + 12 V Power supply for the receiver, switchable

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 4-99


Pin assignment Graphics Card Dotcard-690 AGP

4-100 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Card Reader ID18
The ID18 card reader can process magnetic cards as well as chip cards. The
firmware can be loaded, if necessary, via the serial interface. The card reader
also features a I/O port which is used, for example, to control LEDs (stand-
alone version) or to connect an external pushbutton.
By pushing the pushbutton, cards that have been left inside the device can be
removed.

Magnetic card processing: ISO 7810 and ISO 7811 1 to 5.


Chip card processing: ISO 7816 1 to 3 (protocol T=0, T=1)
EMC 3.1.1 (only download version)
ZKA
Watermark: option

French cards option


(Cartes Bancaires)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-1


Devices with hard-coded firmware Card Reader ID18

Devices with hard-coded firmware


WN delivery Manufactur- Magnetic Tracks Chip Comment
unit er’s name track card
position
ID183.01.0.14 MVFW1JD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes Standard
S01 T2 R/W version
T3 R/W
ID183.02.0.14 MVFW1JD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes Swiss version
S07 T2 R/W (without MM)
T3 R/W
ID183.03.0.14 MVFW1JD- Bottom T1 R/W Yes Magnetic track
B01 T2 R/W position only on
T3 R/W the bottom
ID183.04.0.14 MVFW1D- Top/bottom T1 R/W No
S02 T2 R/W
T3 R/W
ID183.05.0.14 MVFW7D- Top/bottom T2 R/W No
S06 T3 R/W
ID183.06.0.14 MVFW7D- Top/bottom T2 R No without MM
S08 T3 R
01750010380 MVFW1JD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes Standard
S09 T2 R/W version
T3 R/W ZKA cash card
01750010381 MVFW1JD- Bottom T1 R/W Yes Magnetic track
B09 T2 R/W position only on
T3 R/W the bottom
ZKA cash card
01750012262 MVFW1XD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes French version
S10 T2 R/W 16 pin
T3 R/W

current version

5-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Card Reader ID18 Devices with firmware download

Devices with firmware download


WN delivery Manufactur- Magnetic Tracks Chip Comment
unit er’s name track card
position
01750017666 MVFW1JD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes Standard new
replaces P51 T2 R/W functions
01750011372 T3 R/W
01750017665 MVFW1JD- Bottom T1 R/W Yes DL-Bottom
replaces Q51 T2 R/W Down new
01750013781 T3 R/W
01750017663 MVFWR3W7 Top/bottom T0 R Yes DL version
replaces JD-P61 T1 R Watermark
01750012692 T2 R/W
T3 R/W
01750012263 MVFW1XD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes DL version old
S60 T2 R/W France
T3 R/W 16 pins
01750011372 MVFW1JD- Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes Standard in
discontinued S51 T2 R/W "Standalone"
T3 R/W and PTT
01750013781 MVFW1JD- Bottom T1 R/W Yes Bottom Down
discontinued B51 T2 R/W for CSC
T3 R/W 2xx/5xx
01750012692 MVFWR3W7 Top/bottom T0 R Yes DL version
discontinued JD-S61 T1 R Watermark
T2 R/W
T3 R/W
01750017664 MVFW1XD Top/bottom T1 R/W Yes DL Version
replaces P60 T2 R/W new France
01750012263 T3 R/W 16 pins

These devices allow the firmware to be loaded into the ID18 memory.
Download behaviour depends on the parameter settings in the autoexec.bat or
device.sb files.

current versions

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-3


Devices with firmware download Card Reader ID18

All versions (except type S07) are prepared for the inclusion of a MM-/CIM86
sensor. The sensors are screwed. Due to a symmetric arrangement of the card
supply slot (except type B01and Q51) the hybrid card reader can be installed
in standard position or turned around by 180°. As in former devices, functions
such as detection of the card width, magnetic track detection and shutter in the
card transport route are also available.

In case of a power failure, an orderly termination of the current function is


ensured by a built-in capacitor. The reaction to power failures, however, can
also be determined by the application.

i Older hybrid card readers, Type S01, up to serial number 5XX335,


have an adapter plugged on the power connector which must always
stay on the device. With higher serial numbers the adapter is
integrated in the ID 18 by a print change, Masterlabel 1K.
The same is valid for hybrid card readers, Type S02 (Swiss version),
with serial numbers higher than 610001. With the Masterlabel 1A
there is no longer a voltage adapter.

5-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Card Reader ID18 Position of components

Position of components

Sensor MM / CIM Chipkartencontact


Chipcard Contactblock
Block
Shutter Shutter Sensor
Contact Block Sensor
Card width
Sensor
Carddnbreite
sensor Card position
Sensor sensor
Kartenposition
S0 S2 S4

Magnetspurerkennung
magnetic track detector
Magnetkopf
magnetic head

Older models of the hybrid card reader have a 4-pin DIP switch:
Switch 1-3: Factory setting (do not change).
Switch 4 Device reaction after a voltage failure and recovery of the
mains voltage.
OFF: A card which was inside the device before the
voltage failure will remain in the device after voltage
recovery (factory setting).
ON: A card which was inside the device before the
voltage failure will be transported automatically to
the card output.

Devices without a DIP switch will retain the card inside after restoration of the
power supply.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-5


Pin assignment Card Reader ID18

Pin assignment

RS232C Interface
(D-SUB, 9 pin, F), DELC-J9SAF-10L9 (JAE Japan) or equivalent.

Pin Assignment IN/OUT Function


1 NC - Free
2 RXD IN Receive Data
3 TXD OUT Transmit Data
4 DTR OUT Data Terminal Ready
5 GND -
6 NC - Free
7 NC - Free
8 CTS IN Clear To Send
9 NC - Free

5-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Card Reader ID18 Pin assignment

I/O Port
1

Pin Assignment Function


1 GND
2 Port 0 Output
3 Port 1 Output
4 Port 2 Output
5 Port 3 Output
6 Port 4 Output
7 Port 5 Output
8 Port 6 Output
9 Port 7 Output
10 Port 0 Input
11 Port 1 Input
12 Port 2 Input
13 Port 3 Input
14 +5 V

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-7


Power supply Card Reader ID18

Power supply
Type: 5046-04A (Molex Japan)

Pin Assignment
1 Mains voltage (+ 24 V)
2 Ground (GND)
3 Minus external capacitor (XGND)
4 Auxiliary voltage from external capacitor (X24 V)

The following pin assignment is valid for devices with a device release
i Masterlabel < 1K.
These devices have a separate voltage adapter switched between the
device and the power supply. When the ID 18 is exchanged, the
adapter must remain on the card reader.

to card
reader

5-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Card Reader ID18 Maintenance and service

Maintenance and service

Cleaning and test utilities


Use the following cards for maintenance and service:

Test utilities

Hybrid test card 01750000093

Cleaning utilities

Sensor cleaning card 01750000094


Cleaning brush for MM / CIM 86 sensor 01750012317
Universal wet cleaning card for 10600018240 (Siemens Plus)
ChipPine and magnetic head or 01750016388

Spare parts

Capacitor 62213.07.5.35

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-9


Technical data Card Reader ID18

Technical data

Operating voltage: 24 V
Current consumption: max. 2.0 A (during operation)
500 mA (Standby)
Temperature range: 5 to 55 °C in operation

Interface: RS232C
Line speed: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
(automatic detection)
Data Bits: 8
Parity: even
Stop Bits: 1

Life time: 1,500,000 passes or 5 years


(Chip Card Contact Block: 300,000 contacts)
The number of passes is system-dependent,
one transaction may consist of several passes
plus error correction.

5-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DIP Push-in Card Reader (ID24102114)

The push-in card reader for magnetic cards can only read the tracks 2 and 3 of
the card.
The card tracks will only be evaluated when the card is inserted or pulled out.
The application software determines whether the card will be read when it is
inserted, pulled out or in both cases.
At the front of the card insertion slot there is a small window with 2 LEDs.
Red LED: Read error
Green LED: Read process faultless
In the idle state the green LED is lit. As soon as a card is inserted into the
track, the green LED will go out and light up again immediately after a faultless
reading process. When the card is pulled out, the LED is switched off as well,
and after a faultless reading process, the LED is switched on again.
Installation position:
Depending on the customer’s request, the push-in card reader can be installed
in such a way that the magnetic track of the DIP card can either be on top or
on the bottom.
Special holders for either mounting position are not required.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-11


System connection DIP Push-in Card Reader (ID24102114)

System connection
The connection to the system is realised via the V.24 interface (RS 232 C).

Contact Signal Name IN/OUT* Function


1 +5V IN Voltage Vcc
2 GND - Ground
3 TXD OUT Transmit Data
4 RXD IN Receive Data
5 RTS OUT Control signal
6 CTS IN Control signal
7 SG - Ground

* IN = Input signal
OUT = Output signal

5-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


DIP Push-in Card Reader (ID24102114) Technical data

Technical data

Approved magnetic cards: acc. to ISO 7810, 7811, 7813


Weight: 120 g
Speed of card movement: 10 cm/s to 100 cm/s
DC power supply: +5V +5%
Current consumption: ≤ 100 mA

Climatic conditions:
Temperature Humidity
(relative humidity)
Operation: 0 °C to + 60 °C 10 % to 95 %
Storage: - 30 °C to + 70 °C 10 % to 95 %

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-13


Technical data DIP Push-in Card Reader (ID24102114)

5-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214)

The SWIPE card reader for magnetic cards can read tracks 2 and 3 of the
card.
The magnetic tracks can only be read when the card is pulled through
manually. It does not matter in which direction (forward or backward) the card
is pulled through the slot. It can be read either way.
Definition: The card is pulled through in a forward direction if it is inserted at
the funnel-shaped end of the slot (see picture).
The magnetic stripe must face the person pulling it through if the funnel-
shaped end is on the right side (as shown in above picture).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-15


Schematic diagram SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214)

Schematic diagram

3 5

1 Pull-through direction ’forward’


2 Pull-through direction ’backward’
3 Reading heads
4 Photosensor
5 Funnel-shaped end of SWIPE card reader

With the help of the photosensor, the electronics can identify the pull-through
direction and evaluates the data correspondingly.

5-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214) System connection

System connection
The card reader is connected with the system via a V.24 interface (RS 232C).

Contact Signal IN/OUT* Function


1 GND - Ground
2 +5V IN Voltage Vcc
3 SD OUT Send Data
4 RD IN Receive Data
5 - - Not used
6 RS OUT Control signal
7 CS IN Control signal
8 SG - Ground
9 - - Not used
10 - - Not used

* IN = Input signal
OUT = Output signal

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-17


Technical data SWIPE Card Reader (ID24115214)

Technical data

Approved magnetic cards: in acc. with ISO 7810, 7811, 7813


Weight: approx. 200 g
Speed of card movement: 10 cm/s to 100 cm/s
DC power supply: +5V +5%
Current consumption: ≤ 100 mA
Line speed: 1200, 2400, 4800 bps
Data bits: 7+1
Parity: even
Stop bits: 1
Lifetime: 300,000 passes

Climatic conditions:
Temperature Relative humidity
Operation: 0 °C to + 60 °C 10 % to 95 %
Storage: - 30 °C to + 70 °C 10 % to 95 %

Cleaning
Use the following cards for cleaning the SWIPE card reader:

Universal wet cleaning card for 10600018240 (Siemens Plus)


chip contacts and magnetic head or 01750016388

5-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EPP (Krone)
Manufacturer: Krone

Description
The EPP module (Encrypted pin PAD) contains the following functional
elements:
− Keyboard with numeric pad (0 to 9) and 4 function keys for entering the
PIN and carrying out transactions,
− keyboard logic including extensive security circuit components for the
protection of the software and the secret keys used against manipulation
attempts on housings and electronics,
− functions for a secure encryption and decryption of the transmitted
information.
The keys for the PIN input, the analysing logic and encoding electronics are
accommodated in a safety housing.
The baud rate can be changed by the user software from 19,200 to 32,400
baud. Each time the device is switched on, the default of 19,200 baud will be
set.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-19


Maintenance operations EPP (Krone)

Maintenance operations

Replacing the EPP in the event of an error


After replacing the unit, arrange for the initialisation and reloading of the keys.

Replacing the battery


The battery is on the rear side behind an adjustable cover.
To prevent data and keys from getting lost when replacing the battery,
the EPP must be connected to the supply voltage during this time.
When putting the new battery in, make sure that the polarity is correct.

-
+

The built-in lithium cell should be replaced every 5 years for security
i reasons.
To be able to check battery life, the battery should be built in in such a
way that the date of manufacture is readable.

5-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


EPP (Krone) Pin assignment

Battery type
Type: Lithium circular cell CR ½ AA
Nominal voltage: 3V
Manufacturer: Varta
Order no. (Wincor Nixdorf): 31456.07.0.39

Pin assignment

Pin assignment (9 pin M, D SUB)

Pin Name
1 + 24 V
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 -------
5 GND
6 -------
7 -------
8 -------
9 -------

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 5-21


Pin assignment EPP (Krone)

5-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)
The LCD module consists of the TFT LCD component (SVGA) and the
background lighting.
For the operation of the module an additional inverter board (AC-to-DC
converter) for the voltage supply of the lamps and an interface board are
needed.
The inverter is screwed to the monitor. The lamps for the background lighting
are connected with two cables which are situated at the monitor.

Important safety precautions


− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid contact with the
fluid and do not inhale the vapours.
If fluid gets into your mouth or eyes, immediately wash your mouth or eyes
with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which come into contact with this fluid
with alcohol and then thoroughly rinse them with water.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or disconnecting
cables.
− The polarisation filter screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, wipe it off with a soft cloth only.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen
or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
− Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-1


Module view and integration 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Module view and integration


The interface board is connected to the graphics controller and the special
electronics. Via the special electronics, the background lighting can be
switched on by means of the monitor switch as well as the application
software.

Controller inside PC Special electronics

LCD module
Dotronic Interface

Upper background lighting


Inverter

LC-Display

Lower background lighting

6-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552) Technical data LCD

Technical data LCD

Mechanical and environmental conditions

Parameter Values
Picture diagonal 26 (10.4“) cm
Picture surface 211.2 x 158.4 (horizontal / vertical) mm
Pixel formatting 800 x 600 (horizontal / vertical)
Pixel dimension 0.264 x 0.264 (horizontal / vertical) mm
Pixel arrangement R, G, B in vertical orientation
Display mode Standard white
Outer dimensions 32.5 x 126.5 x 12 (W x H x D) mm
Weight 600 g
Display surfaces Anti-glare feature and hard coating
treatment Cloudiness: 25 ± 5 %
Operation Temperature: 0 to + 50 0C
Storage Temperature: - 20 to + 60 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.

Electrical properties (maximum values)

Parameter Max. Unit


Voltage supply 7 V

Signal input voltage + 0.3 V

Lamp voltage 2000 V


Lamp voltage frequency 100 KHz

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-3


Technical data LCD 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Electrical properties of background lighting

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Supply voltage 9.0 12.0 19.0 V
’H’ Input 3.5 0.3 V
’L’ Input - 0.3 1.5 V
Lamp voltage 500 550 600 V
Lamp voltage frequency 25 30 35 KHz
Lamp starting voltage 1500 Veff

6-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552) Technical data LCD

Pin assignment: Interface

Pin Signal Function


1 GND
2 NCLKCK Clock frequency
3 GND
4 R0 RED data signal (LSB)
5 R1 RED data signal
6 R2 RED data signal
7 GND
8 R3 RED data signal
9 R4 RED data signal
10 R5 RED data signal (MSB)
11 GND
12 G0 GREEN data signal (LSB)
13 G1 GREEN data signal
14 G2 GREEN data signal
15 GND
16 G3 GREEN data signal
17 G4 GREEN data signal
18 G5 GREEN data signal (MSB)
19 GND
20 ENAB Sync signal
21 GND
22 B0 BLUE data signal (LSB)
23 B1 BLUE data signal
24 B2 BLUE data signal
25 GND
26 B3 BLUE data signal
27 B4 BLUE data signal
28 B5 BLUE data signal (MSB)
29 GND
30 VDD + 5.0 V supply
31 VDD + 5.0 V supply

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-5


Technical data LCD 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 VHIGH Lamp voltage
2 NC No connection
3 VLOW Lamp voltage

6-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552) Inverter

Inverter
The inverter can be switched on and off with the signals V ON / OFF. The
signal ALM is used to monitor the background lighting lamp.
The unit does not make use of the technical features for controlling the lamp
brightness and for monitoring the background lighting.

Technical data

Parameter Values
Input voltage: 9 to 19 V DC
Lamp starting voltage: < 1500 V / 25 to 35 KHz
Operating conditions: Temperature: 0 to 50 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage conditions: Temperature: - 20 to 60 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
MTTF > 50,000 h (at 25 °C and 65 % r.h.)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-7


Inverter 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Pin assignment: Input connector

Pin Signal Function


1 NC No connection
2 ALM Lamp monitoring alarm signal (output)
Signal < 0.4 V: normal operation
3 * VR Connection of external potentiometer
(10 KΩ) between pins 3 and 5 for brightness
control
4 NC No connection
5 * VR60 Connection of external potentiometer
(10 KΩ) between pins 3 and 5 for brightness
control
6 V in 12 V (9 to 19 V)
7 V in 12 V (9 to 19 V)
8 V ON/OFF Open collector TTL
’L’: lamps ON ’H’ or ’Open’: OFF
9 GND Ground
10 GND Ground
* 0 Ω: maximum brightness
10 KΩ: minimum brightness

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 VFL Lamp voltage
2
3 VFLG Lamp voltage

6-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552) Dotronic interface card

Dotronic interface card

Dotcard – LVPL

1
2 1
X7
X2

19
JP1

20
1
2
1
32 31

X4
JP5
2 1 JP6
1

17
35
18
36
1
X5

S1
F1

ON
F2

26 25
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6

Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics card and interface


card.
The cable for the Dotronic graphics card will be connected to this female
connector.
Connector X2 / X5: Connection for flat display
These 32-pin and 26-pin male connectors are used to connect the flat display
with the Dotcard-LVPL.
Connector X7: External connection for background lighting ON / OFF
Signal from the special electronics.

Setting of the microswitch and jumpers


The settings will be shown in the chapter "Function and Integration", section
"Operating the flat displays". Further information about this interface card is
contained in the chapter "Dotcard-LVPL".

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-9


Pin assignment 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Pin assignment

Pin assignment: Inverter


See section "Inverter" in this chapter. (1:1-connection)

Pin assignment: LC display


See section "Technical data LCD" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: Interface card


See chapter "Dotcard-LVPL".

6-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552) Removal/installation of background lighting

Removal/installation of background lighting


• Please note the section "Important safety precautions" in this chapter.

The lives of the background-lighting lamps (cold-cathode fluorescent tube)


depend on the operating conditions; the minimum value is 10,000 h.
In the event of a failure, always replace both lamps.

Proceed as follows to replace the lamps:


Remove the mounting screws (1) to
(4) and remove the cover.

Disconnect plugs (1) and (2) for the


background lighting and
plug (3).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-11


Removal/installation of background lighting 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020552)

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and remove the case.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and take out the LC display.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and take out the background
lighting lamps.
The installation is carried out in the
reverse order of steps.

6-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)
The LCD module consists of the TFT LCD module (VGA) and the background
lighting.
For the operation of the module an additional inverter board (AC-to-DC
converter) for the voltage supply of the background lighting lamp and an
interface board are needed.
The inverter is screwed to the monitor, the lamps for the background lighting
are connected with two cables which are situated at the monitor.

Important safety precautions


− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapours.
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your mouth or eyes
with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which come into contact with this fluid
with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water afterwards.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or disconnecting
cables.
− The polarisation filter screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen or
to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
− Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-13


Module view and integration 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Module view and integration


The interface board is connected to the graphics controller and the special
electronics. Via the special electronics, the background lighting can be
switched on by means of the monitor switch as well as the application
software.

Controller inside PC Special electronics

LCD module
Dotronic Interface

Upper background lighting


Inverter

LC-Display

Lower background lighting

6-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555) Technical data LCD

Technical data LCD

Mechanical and environmental conditions

Parameter Values
Picture diagonal 26 (10.4“) cm
Picture surface 211.2 x 158.4 (horizontal / vertical) mm
Pixel formatting 640 x 480 (horizontal / vertical)
Pixel dimension 0.33 x 0.33 (horizontal / vertical) mm
Pixel arrangement R, G, B n vertical orientation
Display mode Standard white
Outer dimensions 32.5 x 126.5 x 12 (W x H x D) mm
Weight 380 g
Display surfaces Anti-glare feature and hard coating
treatment Cloudiness: 25 ± 5 %
Operation Temperature: 0 to + 50 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage Temperature: - 20 to + 60 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.

Electrical properties (maximum values)

Parameter Max. Unit


Voltage supply 20 V

Signal input voltage + 0.3 V

Lamp voltage 2000 V


Lamp voltage frequency 100 kHz

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-15


Technical data LCD 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Electrical properties of background lighting

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Supply voltage 9.0 12.0 19.0 V
’H’ Input 3.5 0.3 V
’L’ Input - 0.3 1.5 V
Lamp voltage 500 550 600 V
Lamp voltage frequency 25 30 35 KHz
Lamp starting voltage 1500 Veff

6-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555) Technical data LCD

Pin assignment: Interface

Pin Signal Function


1 GND
2 NCLKCK Clock frequency
3 GND
4 R0 RED data signal (LSB)
5 R1 RED data signal
6 R2 RED data signal
7 GND
8 R3 RED data signal
9 R4 RED data signal
10 R5 RED data signal (MSB)
11 GND
12 G0 GREEN data signal (LSB)
13 G1 GREEN data signal
14 G2 GREEN data signal
15 GND
16 G3 GREEN data signal
17 G4 GREEN data signal
18 G5 GREEN data signal (MSB)
19 GND
20 ENAB Sync signal
21 GND
22 B0 BLUE data signal (LSB)
23 B1 BLUE data signal
24 B2 BLUE data signal
25 GND
26 B3 BLUE data signal
27 B4 BLUE data signal
28 B5 BLUE data signal (MSB)
29 GND
30 VDD + 5.0 V supply
31 VDD + 5.0 V supply

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-17


Technical data LCD 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 VHIGH Lamp voltage
2 NC No connection
3 VLOW Lamp voltage

6-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555) Inverter

Inverter
The inverter can be switched on and off with the signals V ON / OFF. The
signal ALM is used to monitor the background lighting lamp.
The unit does not make use of the technical features for controlling the lamp
brightness and for monitoring the background lighting.

Technical data

Parameter Values
Input voltage: 9 to 19 V DC
Lamp starting voltage: < 1500 V / 25 to 35 KHz
Operating conditions: Temperature: 0 to 50 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage conditions Temperature: - 20 to 60 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
MTTF > 50,000 h (at 25 0C and 65 % r.h)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-19


Inverter 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Pin assignment: Input connector

Pin Signal Function


1 NC No connection
2 ALM Lamp monitoring alarm signal (output)
Signal < 0.4 V: normal operation
3 * VR Connection of external potentiometer
(10 KΩ) between pins 3 and 5 for brightness
control
4 NC No connection
5 * VR60 Connection of external potentiometer
(10 KΩ) between pins 3 and 5 for brightness
control
6 V in 12 V (9 to 19 V)
7 V in 12 V (9 to 19 V)
8 V ON/OFF Open collector TTL
’L’: lamps ON ’H’ or ’Open’: OFF
9 GND Ground
10 GND Ground
* 0 Ω: maximum brightness
10 KΩ: minimum brightness

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 VFL Lamp voltage
2
3 VFLG Lamp voltage

6-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555) Dotronic interface card

Dotronic interface card

Dotcard – LVPL

1
2 1
X7
X2

19
JP1

20
1
2
1
32 31

X4
JP5
2 1 JP6
1

17
35
18
36
1
X5

S1
F1

ON
F2

26 25
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6

Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics card and interface


card.
The cable for the Dotronic graphics card will be connected to this female
connector.
Connector X2 / X5: Connection for flat display
These 32-pin and 26-pin male connectors are used to connect the flat display
with the Dotcard-LVPL.
Connector X7: External connection for background lighting ON / OFF
Signal from the special electronics.

Setting of the microswitch and jumpers:


The settings will be shown in the chapter "Function and Integration", section
"Operating the flat displays". Further information about this interface card is
contained in the chapter "Dotcard-LVPL".

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-21


Pin assignment 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Pin assignment

Pin assignment: Inverter


See section "Inverter" in this chapter (1:1-connection).

Pin assignment: LC display


See section "Technical data LCD" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: Interface card


See chapter "Dotcard-LVPL".

6-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555) Removal/installation of background lighting

Removal/installation of background lighting


• Please note the section "Important safety precautions" in this chapter.

The live of the background lighting lamps (cold-cathode fluorescent tube)


depends on the operating conditions; the minimum value is 10,000 h.
In the event of a failure always replace both lamps.

Proceed as follows to replace the lamps:


Remove the mounting screws (1) to
(4) and remove the cover.

Disconnect plugs (1) and (2) for the


background lighting and plug (3).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-23


Removal/installation of background lighting 10.4“ LCD Monitor (01750020555)

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and remove the case.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and take out the LC display.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and remove the background
lighting lamps.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

6-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)
The LCD module consists of the TFT LCD component (SVGA) and the
background lighting.
For the operation of the module an additional inverter board (AC-to-DC
converter) for the voltage supply of the background lighting lamp and an
interface board are needed.
The inverter is screwed to the monitor. The lamps for the background lighting
are connected with two cables which are situated at the monitor.

Important safety precautions


− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid coming into
contact with the fluid and do not inhale the vapours.
If fluid gets into the mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or mouth
with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which come into contact with this fluid
with alcohol and carefully rinse them with water afterwards.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or disconnecting
cables.
− The polarisation filter screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, only wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen
or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
− Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-25


Module view and integration 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

Module view and integration


The interface board is connected to the graphics controller and the special
electronics. Via the special electronics, the background lighting can be
switched on by means of the monitor switch as well as the application
software.

Controller inside PC Special electronics

LCD module
Dotronic Interface

Upper background lighting


Inverter

LC-Display

Lower background lighting

6-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) Technical data

Technical data

General

Parameter Values
Outer dimensions 290.0 x 220.0 x 15.0 (W x H x D) mm
Weight 840 ± 30 g
Operation Temperature: 0 to + 50 °C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Storage Temperature: - 20 to + 60 0C
Humidity: 10 to 90 % r.h.
Lifetime 50000 h (at 25 °C and 65 % r.h.)
(without background lighting)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-27


Technical data 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

LCD

Mechanical conditions

Parameter Values
Picture diagonal 31 (12.1“) cm
Picture surface 246.0 x 184.5 (horizontal x vertical) mm
Pixel formatting 800 x 600 (horizontal x vertical)
Pixel dimension 0.3075 x 0.3075 (horizontal x vertical) mm
Pixel arrangement R, G, B in vertical orientation
Display-Mode Standard white
Display surfaces Anti-glare feature and hard coating
treatment

Recommended operating conditions

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Voltage supply (VDD) 4.75 5.00 5.25 V
'H' Input 3.5 VDD V
'L' Input 0 1.5 V

Maximum operating conditions

Parameter Max. Unit


Voltage supply (VDD) 7 V

Signal input voltage VDD + 0.3 V

6-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) Technical data

Pin assignment: Interface

Pin Signal Function


1 GND
2 NCLK Clock frequency
3 NC
4 NC
5 GND
6 R0 RED data signal (LSB)
7 R1 RED data signal
8 R2 RED data signal
9 R3 RED data signal
10 R4 RED data signal
11 R5 RED data signal (MSB)
12 GND
13 G0 GREEN data signal (LSB)
14 G1 GREEN data signal
15 G2 GREEN data signal
16 G3 GREEN data signal
17 G4 GREEN data signal
18 G5 GREEN data signal (MSB)
19 GND
20 B0 BLUE data signal (LSB)
21 B1 BLUE data signal
22 B2 BLUE data signal
23 B3 BLUE data signal
24 B4 BLUE data signal
25 B5 BLUE data signal (MSB)
26 ENAB Sync signal
27 GND
28 VDD + 5.0 V supply
29 VDD + 5.0 V supply
30 GND

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-29


Technical data 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

Background lighting

Recommended operating conditions

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Lamp voltage 500 550 600 V
Lamp voltage frequency 25 30 35 KHz
Lamp starting voltage 1500 Veff
Lifetime 30000 h

Maximum operating conditions

Parameter Max. Unit


Lamp voltage 2000 V
Lamp voltage frequency 100 KHz

Pin assignment

Pin Signal Function


1 VFLH Lamp voltage (High Voltage)
2 NC No connection
3 VFLL Lamp voltage (Low Voltage)

6-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) Technical data

Inverter

Pin assignment: Input connector

Pin Signal Function


1 NC No connection
2 BRT_ADJ 0-5V
3 NC No connection
4 BL ON/OFF CCFL controlling (active high)
5 NC No connection
6 GND Ground
7 NC No connection
8 GND Ground
9 GND Ground
10 DC -IN 12 V DC voltage
11 DC -IN 12 V DC voltage
12 NC No connection

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 HOT (High 1)
2 HOT (High 2)
3 NC No connection
4 COLD Ground

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-31


Dotronic interface card 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

Dotronic interface card


Dotcard – LVPL

1
2 1
X7
X2

19
JP1

20
1
2
1
32 31

X4
JP5
JP6

2 1

17
35
18
36
1
X5

S1
F1

ON
F2

26 25
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6

Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics card and interface card.
The cable for the Dotronic graphics card will be connected to this female
connector.
Connector X2 / X5: Connection for flat display
These 32-pin and 26-pin male connectors are used to connect the flat display
with the Dotcard-LVPL.
Connector X7: External connection for background lighting ON / OFF
Signal from the special electronics.

Setting of the microswitch and jumpers:


The adjustment will be shown in the chapter "Function and Integration",
section "Operating the flat displays".
Further information about this interface card is contained in the chapter
"Dotcard-LVPL".

6-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) Pin assignment

Pin assignment

Pin assignment: Inverter


See section "Inverter" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: LC display


See section "Technical data LCD" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: Interface card


See chapter "Dotcard LVPL".

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-33


Removal/installation of background lighting 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

Removal/installation of background lighting


• Please note the section "Important safety precautions" in this chapter.

The live of the background-lighting lamps (cold-cathode fluorescent tube)


depends on the operating conditions. The average amounts to 30,000 h.
In the event of a failure always replace both lamps.

Proceed as follows to replace the lamps:


• Remove the LCD-monitor (see chapter "Removal/Installation of
Components").

Loosen the mounting screws (1) to


(4), pull the cover a little toward you
and remove it.

6-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892) Removal/installation of background lighting

Disconnect the plugs (1) to (2) for the


background lighting.
Turn the case so that the LC display
shows up.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and take the LC display out of the
case.

Disconnect the plug (1).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-35


Removal/installation of background lighting 12.1“ LCD monitor (01750020892)

Remove the corresponding screws


(1) and (2) or (3) and (4) and take out
the elements of the background
lighting.

Reinstall it by following the same


steps in reverse order.
During installation make sure that the
cables are positioned as shown in the
picture.

6-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-LVPL

Introduction
The Dotcard-LVPL interface is used for the transfer of digital flat display
signals over longer distances without degradation in quality. The max. distance
between graphic card and flat display can amount to 10 m.
The following diagram illustrates how the Dotcard-LVPL interface operates.

System control unit

Dotcard graphics card


parallel signals
Graphics controller
TTL level

Serial signals,
differential,
low voltage

Dotcard-LVPL receiver
parallel signals
Flat panel
TTL level

LCD unit

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-37


Placing DIP switches, connectors and jumpers Dotcard-LVPL

Placing DIP switches, connectors and jumpers

1
2 1
X7
X2

19
JP1

20
1
2
1
32 31

X4
JP5
JP6
2 1

17
35
18
36
1
X5

S1
F1

ON
F2

26 25
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6

6-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-LVPL Description of the connectors

Description of the connectors

Connector X4: Connection between graphics card and


receiver
The connection cable for the Dotronic graphics card will be connected at this
female connector.

Connector X2 and X5: Link for flat display


These 32-pin and 26-pin male connectors are used to connect the flat display
to the Dotcard-LVPL receiver. The receiver supports active displays with a
max. data bus width of 36 bits.

Connector X7: External connection for backlight ON / OFF

Attention: The signal which fits here is only effective, if the jumper
JP6 is in the position 1 - 2!
Pin assignment Function Circuit suggestion
To switch the backlight inverter on
1 SWITCH or off, an external switching signal 1
2 GND can be connected to this plug. 2
The signal should have TTL levels
(standard: GND = display OFF;
5 V = display ON).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-39


Jumper setting Dotcard-LVPL

Jumper setting

JP1: Display voltage

Jumper setting Function


Standard
Display voltage is 5 V. setting
3 2 1

Display voltage is 3.3 V.


3 2 1

JP5: “DISPON” Signal level

Jumper setting Function


The output DISPON works as Open Standard
3
2 Drain. setting
1 The max. current load is 100 mA.

The output DISPON carries the signal


3
2 level which is fed via X7 or from the
1 Dotronic graphics card generated TTL
level (see also connector X7).

6-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-LVPL Jumper setting

JP6: “DISPON” source

Jumper setting Function

1
The signal DISPON (backlight ON/Off) is Standard
2 externally generated and fed over X7 (see setting
3 also connector X7).

1 The signal DISPON (Backlight ON/Off) is


2 generated by the Dotronic graphics card.
3
The signal has TTL level.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-41


Jumper setting Dotcard-LVPL

Setting DIP switch S1

Switch # Function
S1.1 Pixel per CLK. (see Table 1 for further details)
ON The Dotcard LVPL receiver outputs data with one pixel
per CLK. The display data P[0:23] is adjacent at the plug
X2 (standard setting).
OFF The Dotcard LVPL receiver outputs data with two pixels
per CLK. The display data P[0:35] is adjacent at the plug
X2 and X5.
S1.2 CLK Polarity (see Table 1 for further details)
ON DE and check signals are synchronised on the rising
CLK edge (standard setting).
OFF DE and check signals are synchronised on the falling
CLK edge.
S1.3 Reserved
Do not modify this switch. Keep the standard setting OFF.
ON
OFF (Standard setting)
S1.4 Select the terminating resistor (contact the manufacturer before
making any modifications!)
ON The terminating resistor of the receiver unit is in the 55 Ω
to 70 Ω range.
OFF The terminating resistor of the receiver unit is in the of 40
Ω to 57 Ω range (standard setting).
S1.5 Mask CLK (see Table 1 for further details)
ON The CLK signal is continuous (standard setting).
OFF The CLK signal is stopped, when DE is low.
S1.6 Power Down Mode
ON The PanelLink receiver is in the power down mode.
OFF Normal operation (standard adjustment)

1 2 3 4 5 6 ON
OFF

6-42 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-LVPL Fuse

S1.5 S1.2 S1.1 Display Description


OFF ON ON STN CLK divided by 1 and taken over at DE low.
OFF OFF ON NONE
OFF ON OFF STN CLK divided by 2 and taken over at DE low.
OFF OFF OFF STN CLK divided by 4 and taken over at DE low.
ON ON ON TFT One pixel per CLK with unsolicited clock
ON OFF ON TFT One pixel per CLK with unsolicited clock,
signal inverted
ON ON OFF TFT Two pixels per CLK with unsolicited clock
ON OFF OFF TFT Two pixels per CLK with unsolicited clock,
signal inverted

Table 1
The settings for the STN displays, shown in the table, are not supported by the
customised version of the LVPL receiver.

Fuse
Fuse Protected voltage Type
F1 + 12 V Display 3 A, fast, 125 V, version Picofuse
F2 + VDD Display 3 A, fast, 125 V, version Picofuse

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-43


Pin assignment Dotcard-LVPL

Pin assignment

Connector X4
Pin Signal name Description
1 TxC+ Strobe line, differential (positive)
2 GND
3 TxC- Strobe line, differential (negative)
4 GND
5 Tx0- Data line 0, differential (negative)
6 GND
7 Tx0+ Data line 0, differential (positive)
8 GND
9 Tx1- Data line 1, differential (negative)
10 GND
11 Tx1+ Data line 1, differential (positive)
12 GND
13 Tx2- Data line 2, differential (negative)
14 GND
15 Tx2+ Data line 2, differential (positive)
16 GND
17 N.C. Not connected
18 GND
19 GND
20 V0 Positive controlled voltage (optional)
21 GND
22 N.C. Not connected
23 GND
24 N.C. Not connected
25 GND
26 N.C. Not connected
27 GND
28 N.C. Not connected
29 GND
30 N.C. Not connected
31 GND
32 + 12 V Power supply
33 GND
34 + 12 V Power supply
35 GND
36 + 12 V Power supply

6-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-LVPL Pin assignment

Connector X2

Pin Signal name Description


1 GND
2 VSYNC Display vertical synchronisation
3 GND
4 HSYNC Display horizontal synchronisation
5 GND
6 CLK Display clock (max. 65 MHz)
7 GND
8 ENAB Display data enable
9 P1 Display data bit 1
10 P0 Display data bit 0
11 P3 Display data bit 3
12 P2 Display data bit 2
13 P5 Display data bit 5
14 P4 Display data bit 4
15 P7 Display data bit 7
16 P6 Display data bit 6
17 P9 Display data bit 9
18 P8 Display data bit 8
19 P11 Display data bit 11
20 P10 Display data bit 10
21 P13 Display data bit 13
22 P12 Display data bit 12
23 P15 Display data bit 15
24 P14 Display data bit 14
25 P17 Display data bit 17
26 P16 Display data bit 16
27 P19 Display data bit 19
28 P18 Display data bit 18
29 P21 Display data bit 21
30 P20 Display data bit 20
31 P23 Display data bit 23
32 P22 Display data bit 22

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-45


Pin assignment Dotcard-LVPL

Connector X5

Pin Signal name Description


1 P24 Display data bit 24
2 DISPON Display or background lighting On / Off
3 P25 Display data bit 25
4 GND
5 P26 Display data bit 26
6 GND
7 P27 Display data bit 27
8 GND
9 P28 Display data bit 28
10 GND
11 P29 Display data bit 29
12 GND
13 P30 Display data bit 30
14 GND
15 P31 Display data bit 31
16 GND
17 P32 Display data bit 32
18 V0 positive controlled voltage only as option (0.8 V –
3.9 V)
19 P33 Display data bit 33
20 VDD Switchable display power supply (3.3 V or 5 V)
21 P34 Display data bit 34
22 VDD Switchable display power supply (3.3 V or 5 V)
23 P35 Display data bit 35
24 VDD Switchable display power supply (3.3 V or 5 V)
25 12VDISP Switchable 12 V power supply
26 12VDISP Switchable 12 V power supply

Connector X7
Pin Signal name
1 Switching input
2 GND

6-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)
The LCD module consists of the TFT LCD component (XGA) and the
background lighting.
For the operation of the module, an additional inverter board (AC-to-DC
converter) for the voltage supply of the background lighting lamp and an
interface board are needed.
The inverter is screwed to the monitor. The lamps for the background lighting
are connected with two cables which are located at the monitor.

Important safety precautions


− If the LCD panel breaks and fluid seeps out, avoid contact with the
fluid and do not inhale the vapours.
If any fluid gets into your mouth or eyes, immediately wash your eyes or
mouth with water.
Wash any areas of skin or clothing which have come into contact with this
fluid with alcohol and then thoroughly rinse them with water.
− Always switch off the power supply when connecting or disconnecting
cables.
− The polarisation filter screen is very sensitive and must be protected
against scratches.
− To clean the display screen, wipe it off with a soft cloth only.
Before cleaning the screen, it may be advisable to breathe on the screen
or to slightly dampen the cloth with cleaning spirit.
− Avoid any mechanical pressure in order not to break the glass.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-47


Module view and integration 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

Module view and integration


The interface board is connected to the graphics controller and the special
electronics. Via the special electronics, the background lighting can be
switched on by means of the monitor switch or by means of the application
software.

Controller inside PC Special electronics

LCD module
Dotronic Interface

Upper background lighting


Inverter

LC-Display

Lower background lighting

6-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Technical data

Technical data

General

Parameter Values
Outer dimensions 368.0 x 275.0 x 20.0 (W x H x D) mm
Weight 1550 g

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-49


Technical data 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

LCD

Mechanical conditions

Parameter Values
Picture diagonal 38 (15“) cm
Picture surface 304.1 x 228.1 (horizontal x vertical) mm
Pixel formatting 1024 x 768 (horizontal x vertical)
Pixel dimension 0c297 x 0c297 (horizontal x vertical) mm
Pixel arrangement R, G, B in vertical orientation
Display mode Standard white
Display surface Anti-glare feature and hard coating
treatment

Recommended operating conditions

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Voltage supply (VDD) 4.75 5.00 5.25 V

Maximum operating conditions

Parameter Max. Unit


Voltage supply (VDD) 6 V

6-50 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Technical data

Interface - Pin assignment

Pin Signal Function


1 VDD + 5.0 V supply
2 VDD + 5.0 V supply
3 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
5 RX2+ Data input (positive)
6 RX2- Data input (negative)
7 GND Ground
8 RX1+ Data input (positive)
9 RX1- Data input (negative)
10 GND Ground
11 RX0+ Data input (positive)
12 RX0- Data input (negative)
13 GND Ground
14 RXC- Data input (negative)
15 RXC+ Data input (positive)
16 GND Ground
17 NC No connection
18 NC No connection
19 GND Ground
20 GND Ground

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-51


Technical data 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

Background lighting

Recommended operating conditions

Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit


Lamp voltage 690 Veff
Lamp voltage frequency 55 KHz
Lamp starting voltage 1100 (25 °C) Veff
1420 (0 °C)
Lifetime 20000 h

Maximum operating conditions

Parameter Min. Max. Unit


Lamp currency 4.0 12.0 mA
Lamp voltage frequency 30 80 KHz

Pin assignment

Pin Signal Function


1 Hot 1 Lamp voltage (High Voltage)
2 Hot 2 Lamp voltage (High Voltage)
3 NC No connection
4 Cold Ground

6-52 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Technical data

Inverter

Pin assignment: Input connector

Pin Signal Function


1 NC No connection
2 BRT_ADJ 0-5V
3 NC No connection
4 BL ON/OFF CCFL controlling (active high)
5 NC No connection
6 GND Ground
7 NC No connection
8 GND Ground
9 GND Ground
10 DC -IN 12 V DC voltage
11 DC -IN 12 V DC voltage
12 NC No connection

Pin assignment: Lamp connector

Pin Signal Function


1 HOT (High 1)
2 HOT (High 2)
3 NC No connection
4 COLD Ground

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-53


Dotronic interface card 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

Dotronic interface card


Dotcard – PL Adapter

1
2 1
X7
JP5
X2

19
20
1
2
JP1
32 31
1 1

X4
F2

17
35
18
36
R150

Connector X2: Connector for flat display


This 32-pin male connector is used to connect the flat display with the Dotcard-
PL Adapter.

Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics card and adapter


The cable for the Dotronic graphics card will be connected to the 36-pin female
connector.

Connector X7: External connection for background lighting ON / OFF


Signal from the special electronics.

6-54 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Dotronic interface card

Adjustment of the PL adapter card:


The factory jumper setting from this card does not have to be changed (see
chapter "Function and Integration", section "Operating the flat displays").

For further information on this interface card refer to the chapter "Dotcard-PL".

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-55


Pin assignment 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

Pin assignment

Pin assignment: Inverter


See section "Inverter" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: LC display


See section "Technical data – LCD" in this chapter.

Pin assignment: Interface card


See chapter "Dotcard – PL adapter"

6-56 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Removal/installation of background lighting

Removal/installation of background lighting


• Please note the section "Important safety precautions" in this chapter.

The life of the background lighting lamps (cold-cathode fluorescent tube)


depends on the operating conditions; the minimum value is 20,000 h.
In the event of a failure, always replace both lamps.

Proceed as follows to replace the lamps:


• Remove the LCD monitor (see chapter "Removal/Installation of
Components").

The knurled screws shown in the following pictures are no longer


used in the current systems since the monitor is in part mounted
using spring locating pins.

Loosen the mounting screws (1) to


(3), slightly pull the cover to the left
and remove it.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-57


Removal/installation of background lighting 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

Disconnect plug (1).

Loosen the mounting screws (1) to


(8) and remove the cover.

Remove the mounting screws (1) to


(4) and take the LC display out of the
case.

6-58 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326) Removal/installation of background lighting

Disconnect plugs (1) and/or (2) for


the background lighting.

Remove the mounting screw (1) of


the corresponding background
lighting.

Remove the elements of the


background lighting to the left (see
arrow).
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-59


Removal/installation of background lighting 15“ LCD Monitor (01750020326)

6-60 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-PL Adapter

Introduction
The Dotcard-PL adapter is used for easy connection of flat displays with
integrated PanelLink receivers to Dotronic cards with an integrated PanelLink
transmitter. The Dotcard-PL adapter generates all the voltages which are
needed by the display from an 12 V input voltage which is supplied by the
Dotronic graphics card. The following diagram illustrates the signal flow of the
Dotronic graphics card to the flat display.

System control unit


Dotronic graphics card PanelLink
Transmitter
parallel signals Dotronic 1:1 Twinax cable
Flat panel
PLI
graphics
TTL level plug (Serial signals,
controller
differential,
low voltage)

PanelLink Receiver
Dotronic
Flat panel PLI
Serial signals, plug
differential,
low voltage

LCD unit

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-61


Position of connectors and jumpers Dotcard-PL Adapter

Position of connectors and jumpers

1
2 1
X7
JP5
X2

19
20
1
2
JP1
32 31
1 1

X4
F2

17
35
18
36
R150

6-62 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-PL Adapter Description of the connectors

Description of the connectors

Connector X4: Connection between Dotronic graphics


card and adapter
The connection cable for the Dotronic graphics card is connected at this 36-pin
female connector.

Connector X2: Connection for flat display


This 32-pin male connector is used to connect the flat display to the Dotcard-
PL adapter. The adapter supports all displays with an integrated PanelLink
receiver.

Connector X7: External connection for backlight ON / OFF

Pin assignment Function Circuit suggestion

1 SWITCH To switch the backlight inverter 1


2 GND on or off an external switching 2
signal can be connected to this
connector. The level of the used
signal depends on the used
backlight inverter (standard: TTL
level GND = display OFF; 5 V =
display ON).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-63


Jumper setting Dotcard-PL Adapter

Jumper setting

JP1: Display voltage

Jumper setting Function


Display voltage is 5 V. Standard
setting
3 2 1

Display voltage is 3.3 V.


This setting is not supported.
3 2 1

JP5: “DISPON” Signal level

Jumper setting Function


The signal fed in at X7 is inverted and
3 transmitted to the DISPON output.
2
1 Only use this setting when TTL input
level is used!
The max. current load is 100 mA.
The DISPON output carries the signal Standard
3
2 level, which is fed in via X7 (see also setting
1 connector X7).

6-64 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-PL Adapter Potentiometer R150

Potentiometer R150
With this potentiometer the controlled voltage V0 can be set.
The controlled area ranges between V0min = VDISP * 0.002 and
V0max = VDISP * 0.914.
V0min is the factory setting.

Fuse

Fuse Protected voltage Type


F2 + VDD Display 3 A, fast, 125 V, version Picofuse

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-65


Pin assignment Dotcard-PL Adapter

Pin assignment

Connector X4
Pin Signal name Description
1 RxC+ Strobe line, differential (positive)
2 GND
3 RxC- Strobe line, differential (negative)
4 GND
5 Rx0- Data line 0, differential (negative)
6 GND
7 Rx0+ Data line 0, differential (positive)
8 GND
9 Rx1- Data line 1, differential (negative)
10 GND
11 Rx1+ Data line 1, differential (positive)
12 GND
13 Rx2- Data line 2, differential (negative)
14 GND
15 Rx2+ Data line 2, differential (positive)
16 GND
17 N.C. Not connected
18 GND
19 GND
20 V0 Positive controlled voltage (optional)
21 GND
22 N.C. Not connected
23 GND
24 N.C. Not connected
25 GND
26 N.C. Not connected
27 GND
28 N.C. Not connected
29 GND
30 N.C. Not connected
31 GND
32 + 12 V Power supply
33 GND
34 + 12 V Power supply
35 GND
36 + 12 V Power supply

6-66 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Dotcard-PL Adapter Pin assignment

Connector X2

Pin Signal name Description


1 VDISP Display supply voltage, 3.3 V or 5V; adjustment JP1
2 VDISP Display supply voltage, 3.3 V or 5V; adjustment JP1
3 GND
4 GND
5 RxC+ Strobe line, differential (positive)
6 RxC- Strobe line, differential (negative)
7 GND
8 Rx0- Data line 0, differential (negative)
9 Rx0+ Data line 0, differential (positive)
10 GND
11 Rx1- Data line 0, differential (negative)
12 Rx1+ Data line 0, differential (positive)
13 GND
14 Rx2- Data line 0, differential (negative)
15 Rx2+ Data line 0, differential (positive)
16 GND
17 VADJ 3.3 V (independent from VDISP)
18 VADJ 3.3 V (independent from VDISP)
19 GND
20 GND
21 VADJ 3.3 V (independent from VDISP)
22 VADJ 3.3 V (independent from VDISP)
23 V0 Positive controlled voltage
(V0min=VDISP* 0.002 / V0max=VDISP*0.914)
24 VDISP Display supply voltage, 3.3 V or 5V; adjustment JP1
25 DISDON Switching on signal for the background lighting inverter
26 VDISP Display supply voltage, 3.3 V or 5V; adjustment JP1
27 GND
28 VDISP Display supply voltage, 3.3 V or 5V; adjustment JP1
29 GND
30 GND
31 12VDISP 12 V power
32 12VDISP 12 V power

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-67


Pin assignment Dotcard-PL Adapter

Connector X7

Pin Signal name


1 Switching input
2 GND

6-68 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690
Mat. no. 01750019703: Touchkit with touch pane without LCF
Mat. no. 01750032690: Touchkit with touch pane with LCF

Components
The touchkit consists of the following components:

Touch pane with connector

Remove the litz wires of a new touch pane with side-cutting pliers
right at the connector. The litz wires are not needed.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-69


Components Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690

Touch controller

Cable for keyboard connection

6-70 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690 Operation

Operation
The touch system employs the analogue-capacitive technology; it consists of a
glass plate with a fused-on transparent conductive thin film coating. An
additional glass coating protects the sensor. Thin electrodes are arranged
along the edges which create a uniform low voltage AC field over the
conducting layer.
When touching the monitor surface with the finger, the capacitive coupling with
the electric field causes a brief electrical current flow to the point of contact.
The electrical current from each point of contact is proportional to the distance
of the finger to the edges. The controller measures this ratio, on the basis of
which it determines the point of contact and signals its position via the
interface to the PC.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-71


LED display Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690

LED display
The controller has an LED display which enables a visual check of the ready
status and operability. The LED is lit as soon as the controller is provided with
voltage. After receiving a valid command, the LED display becomes weaker.
A touch of the sensor is indicated by a brightly shining LED. The LED flashes if
the power-on self-test reveals a problem.

Error Flashing frequency within 10 seconds


RAM error 1
ROM error 2
A / D error 3
EEPROM error 4
Analogue error 5

If one of these errors appears, the controller is faulty. The complete monitor
must be replaced.

6-72 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690 Technical data

Technical data

Touchscreen

General information

Technology: Analogue to capacitive


Resolution: 1024 touch points per axis within the
calibrated field
Speed: Max. 115 touches per second
Active touch area: Exact coordinates from 0.1" distance from
the electrodes on the edges
Light transmission: 85 – 95 % at 550 mm
Sensor thickness: 0.125" (± 0.01)
Reliability

FCC certification: Class A

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 6-73


Technical data Touchkit 15“ 01750019703/-32690

Pin assignment of touch controller cable


(9-pin D-SUB F)

Pin Signal Description Explanation


1 DCD Carrier detect Connected to DSR and DTR

2 RXD Received data Data to the PC


3 TXD Transmitted data Data from the PC
4 DTR Data terminal ready
5 SGnd Signal Ground
6 DSR Data set ready
7 RTS Request to send
8 CTS Clear to send
9 ----- -----

A connector pin at the connector housing provides the controller with power.

6-74 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98
Type Material number Description
ND98 01750003288 Installed at front sides
ND98 ND98301003 Installed at the sides

Structure
The journal printer is a modular roll printer. It consists of a print module, a
control unit, a paper holder and a winder. The modules are assembled on a
mounting plate which contains the controller. The interface connector, the
power connector, the controls and status indicators are on the mounting plate.
The printing unit contains the print head, the ribbon cartridge, the platen and
the paper feed unit. The paper holder contains the receptacle for the winder
located on top of it. The winder is driven with a drive belt by the paper feed unit
of the printing unit.
The control unit is held by the mounting plate. The end-of-paper sensor is on
the spring plate used for guiding the paper.

Interfaces

Serial interface connectors


The connector to the host is a 9-pin D-Sub connector (male) with the following
assignment:
Pin Input/output Signal/function
2 Input RxD Receive Data
3 Output TxD Transmit Data
8 Input CTS Clear to send
4 Output DTR Data Transmit ready
5 - Signal Ground

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-1


Functions Journal Printer ND98

Functions

Initialising the printer


The printer is initialised by the following procedure:
− Power on,
− command-driven initialisation.

The following functions are executed during the initialisation:


− Hardware test of the controller, all LEDs ON (only hardware test or switch
on),
− move carrier into home position,
− set printer online,
− set print parameters to default.

In case of an error, the red LED flashes. The flash frequency is approx. 2 Hz. If
a hardware fault is detected, for example a RAM check error, a ‘fatal error’ is
indicated (all LEDs ON). Functions can no longer be executed in this case.
This status can only be interrupted by switching the power off/on.
All error messages are reported via the status to the host.

Indicators
The statuses in the journal printer are indicated by 3 LEDs. The status of the
individual LEDs are as follows:
− Green (permanent): Online/ready
− Yellow (permanent): paper low/end of paper
− Green (flashing): Error

7-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Paper handling

Status indicator

green yellow red Status


on flashing off Online end of paper
on on off Online paper low
on off on Online data in buffer
flashing off off Online data traffic
on off off Online no data

Paper handling

Loading paper
Lift paper pressure rollers by means of the lever and insert paper until it is
above the print area; release the lever. The paper can then be transported to
the winder by pressing the feed key. Insert the paper into the winder and then
feed it with the feed key until it is tightly wrapped around the core.

Removing the paper


The paper can be pulled manually out of the printer.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-3


Error handling Journal Printer ND98

Error handling

Error indication

green yellow red Status


on on off Hardware fault (fatal)
on off flashing No home position (carrier)
off on flashing No clock signal (carrier)

Offline status
The offline status is identified by the error bit set in the status byte. When an
offline status occurs, the printer waits for the status inquiry ’Esc v’ . The printer
goes online again by the status inquiry. The error messages are not deleted by
the status inquiry. If the offline status is ignored and further print jobs are sent
to the printer, they will be destroyed (data loss). The bit "loss of job" will then
be set in the extended error message, and the printer will remain offline.
After an error has occurred, the cause of the fault must be cleared by a
CANCEL command. Depending on the error, an operator intervention may first
be required. The printer resets after the CANCEL command, and the error bit
in the status byte and the error messages in the extended error message are
updated.

Command monitoring
If an error occurs while a command is being processed, the error bit is set in
the status byte (Esc ’v’). The fault causes are indicated in the extended error
message (data request, extended error message). The proper execution of the
command can be monitored by querying the status byte and, if necessary, the
extended error message after every command. The printer goes offline when
an error condition occurs.

7-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Error handling

Paper-low message
The paper-low message is issued at the latest at a remaining number of
approx. 1800 lines (at 6 lpi). It is adjustable and can be set to another number
of remaining lines. The message is only transferred in the status byte (Esc ’v’)
and has no influence on the printer control.

End-of-paper message
The end-of-paper sensor is provided to the system in the status byte (Esc ’v’).
After detection of the end of the paper supply, 20 lines (6 lpi) can still be
printed. If these values are exceeded, the user error bit is set in the extended
error message and the printer goes offline. When the end of paper is indicated,
the operator must load a new roll of paper. A CANCEL must then be carried
out by the system to reset the printer.
If a CANCEL command is issued at end of paper before the remaining 20 lines
have been printed, the printer can no longer continue printing , since the
counter for the remaining lines has been deleted. In this case, the printer can
only be used again after inserting a new roll of paper.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-5


Hardware Journal Printer ND98

Hardware

Controller
The central control of the printer is implemented by an 8-bit microcontroller that
is compatible with the Intel 8032. The controller accommodates the interfaces
to the sensors monitoring mechanical procedures, such as paper monitoring,
carrier reset, etc.. The power logic is also located on the controller card and
provides all electromechanical components with the necessary voltages and
currents.
It consists of:
− Power driver for the paper feed unit stepper motor
− Power driver for the DC carrier motor
− Power driver for the 9 needles of the print head.

Functions
The following functions and elements are monitored by the controller:

Carrier control
Home position Reed switch, signals the 0 position of the carrier and
synchronises the clock signal.
Clock signal Inductive sine wave generator, generates 401 clock
pulses for controlling the print head.

Paper control
End of paper Microswitch; allows you to print another 20 lines (at 6
lpi).
Paper low Microswitch; the message is only fed through and has
no influence on the printer control. Variable setting,
residual amount dependent on the setting, min. 18 mm,
max. 28 mm roll diameter; (max.1800 lines with a pitch
of 1/6").

7-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Test programs

Test programs
The printer controller provides a test program divided into various test levels.
This program allows you to check the main printer functions.

Controls
The following controls are required for the internal test:
‘Test’ button The ‘Test’ button is used to start the internal test and the test
levels and to terminate the test levels.
‘Feed’ button The ‘Feed’ button is used to select the test levels within the
internal test.
LED When on selection level (LED flashing), the LEDs indicate the
selected test level in binary format when pressing the Feed
button. The LEDs have the following value:
LED red = Value 4
LED yellow = Value 2
LED green = Value 1

Internal test procedure


Procedure:
• Press the ‘Test’ key when switching on the printer and wait until all of the
LEDs have gone out. When the key is released, the printer is in the
selection level of the internal test (all LEDs flashing).
• Select a test with the ‘Feed’ key, start the test by pressing the ‘Test’ key.
• Exit the test level by pressing the ‘Test’ key. The printer has returned to the
selection level (all LEDs flashing).
• Exit the internal test by pressing the ‘Test’ key for more than 2 seconds in
the selection level.
When entering the internal test, the controller disables the V.24 interface. After
completion of the internal test, the printer is initialised, the interface is opened
again and the power failure message provided.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-7


Test levels Journal Printer ND98

Test levels

Test level 1 (paper sensor test)


The two end-of-paper and paper-low sensors are shown in level 1 after
actuation. The order of the actuation is not specified. A status change of a
sensor is shown by a lit LED.
− LED green = End of paper
− LED yellow = Paper low

Test level 2 (carrier sensor test)


The carrier home position sensor is shown in level 1 after actuation. The
actuation is performed by moving the carrier drive by hand. A status change of
the sensor is shown by illuminating a green LED.
The timing can only be shown from of a certain carrier speed on since the
signal is produced inductively. This speed cannot be reached manually. The
timing should be tested with test 3.

Test level 3 (carrier test)


In level 3, the carrier is moved back and forth and the home position and
timing carrier sensors are indicated. The status changes of the sensors are
indicated by the LEDs lighting up.
− LED green = Home position
− LED yellow = Timing

7-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Test levels

Test level 4 (printer test)


The printer is tested in test level 4. Paper must be loaded for this test,
otherwise, the program will return to the selection level without a message.
The printer reports as journal printer NDxx, printing n lines with information
about reference number, program release, etc. After this, 20 print lines with the
character H are printed to test the symmetry of the printed image.
Next, a test staircase pattern is printed to test the printhead needles. The
linefeed is then tested by outputting 6 lines at 6 lpi. Finally, the standard
character set is printed with 4 different pitches. The test is terminated
automatically after one run (printer returns to the selection level without a
message).

If an error occurs
In the case of an error, the program exits the test level to enter the error
handling mode which can only be exited by switching the printer off and on.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-9


Technical data Journal Printer ND98

Technical data

Service life of printing unit


Print head: min. 40,000,000 characters
Printing unit: min. 1,500,000 lines

Room classification
Storage temperature: - 20 °C – + 60 °C
Operating temperature: 0 °C – + 50 °C permanent
Relative humidity:
Storage: 5 % – 90 %
Operation: 10 % – 90 %
Temperature variation: 7 K/hour
Shock: 3 AXIS (5 cm)
Vibration: 0.25 g

Printing unit
Print head
Print mode: Impact serial
Printing method: 9 needles
Vertical needle distance: 0.35 mm
Needle diameter: 0.30 mm
Max. needle frequency: 735 Hz
Life: 40 Mio. characters
Copies: 1 original

7-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Technical data

Ribbon cartridge
Cartridge: Rod-type cartridge
Ribbon: Nylon fabric ribbon
Width: 10.5 mm
Length: 10 m
Tinctorial power: Colour
Black: 1,000,000 characters
Purple: 3,000,000 characters

Paper feed unit


Drive: Bipolar stepper motor
Step width: 1/54"
Micro stepping: 1/216"
Feeding rate: 108 pps or 50 mm/sec
Feed keys: 1

Print functions
Print direction: unidirectional
Print width: max. 68.5 mm
Print matrix: 10 x 9, 12 x 9, 19 x 9 (h x v)
Character set: IBM character set II
Country-specific character sets: Download of user-defined
characters possible
Printer emulation: ND71
Font attributes: Normal type
Double width
Underlined
Bold type
Print character buffer: 8 KB

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-11


Technical data Journal Printer ND98

Paper specifications
Paper width: 76 mm or 3"
Roll diameter: 80 mm max.
Core diameter: 12.5 mm
Paper weight: 60 g/sqm
Paper thickness: 0.07 to 0.09 mm
Paper supply: 60 m, depending on paper weight
approx. 13,000 lines at 6 lpi

Dimensions and weights


Depth: 285 mm (without connectors)
Width: 150 mm
Height: 185 mm
Weight: < 5 kg

Electrical data
Supply voltage: 24 V + 5 %
Power consumption: approx. 40 VA when printing
briefly approx. 80 VA
approx. 5 VA in standby mode
Connectors: 2-pin AMP moduIe

7-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Journal Printer ND98 Technical data

Interface to the host


A V.24 compatible interface is available. The setting for the interface cannot be
changed and has the following operating data:

Operating data of V.24

Baud rate: 9600


Start bit: 1
Data bits: 8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: odd
Protocol: handshake DTR/CTS

Number of bytes until buffer overflow

256 bytes = DTR off, buffer 512 bytes free = DTR ON

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-13


Technical data Journal Printer ND98

7-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E
This chapter describes the following versions of the thermal printer ND9C and
the needle printer ND9E:

Thermal printer ND9C

Material number Description


01750017274 Presenter: 40 mm
Paper width: 80 mm
Roll diameter: 180 mm
01750031090 Presenter: 40 mm
Paper width: 80 mm
Roll diameter: 180 mm
Memory expansion
01750017360 Presenter: 120 mm
Paper width: 80 mm
Roll diameter: 260 mm max.
01750026742 Presenter: 120 mm
Paper width: 80 mm
Roll diameter: 260 mm max.
Memory expansion

Needle printer ND9E

Material number Description


01750017277 Presenter: 40 mm
Paper width: 70, 76 and 82.5 mm
Roll diameter: 180 mm
01750020561 Presenter: 120 mm
Paper width: 70, 76 and 82.5 mm
Roll diameter: 260 mm max.
01750033320 Presenter: 120 mm
Paper width: 70, 76 and 82.5 mm
Roll diameter: 180 mm max.

Current version

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-15


Connection of the printer Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

The thermal (needle) printer ND9C (ND9E) is a modular printer with a thermal
printing unit (needle printing unit), integrated cutter and the presenter for
variable receipt length. The paper path is controlled by several paper sensors.
The following description contains no information on the normal operation of
the printer. You can find this information in the Operating Manual of the cash-
out system. Installation and removal are described in the Service Manual of the
respective system.

Connection of the printer


Connect the printer only when the system is disconnected from the
power supply.

Power supply
The printer is operated with 24 V DC. The 5 V voltage for the logic is
generated internally.

Data interface
The serial data interface (V.24 / RS232) is connected to the COM channel
defined in the cash or terminal system.

7-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Connection of the printer

Block diagram ND9C

Mark controlling Paper holder Cutter Printing unit HTP576/832

Sensors Sensors Motor Sensors Print Paper Sensors


head transport

Interface thermal Controlling Interface needle


Interface paper sensors Interface cutter printing unit
printing unit paper feed
MP312N

Controller receipt printer


V.24
V.24 driver Flash 128 KB Controlling receipt/journal
SRAM 32 KB
MCU 8x930Ax with bootsector needle
FPGA XiIinx
INTEL 256 Bit EEPROM
optional extension
512 KB over I/O
optional extension
USB 512KB over I/O
Interface

Customer panel
Interface presenter + 5 V power supply
display

Motor Sensors

Presenter

Power supply

Block diagram ND9E

Printing unit
Mark controlling Paper holder Cutter Paper feed
MP312N

Paper
Sensors Sensors Motor Sensor
feed

Interface thermal Controlling Interface needle


Interface paper sensors Interface cutter printing unit
printing unit paper feed
MP312N

Controller receipt printer


V.24
V.24 driver Flash 128 KB Controlling receipt/journal
SRAM 32 KB
MCU 8x930Ax with bootsector needle
FPGA XiIinx
INTEL optional extension
256 Bit EEPROM
512 KB over I/O
optional extinsion
USB 512 KB over I/O
Interface

Customer panel
Interface presenter + 5 V power supply
display

Motor Sensors

Presenter

Power supply

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-17


Views of thermal printer ND9C Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Views of thermal printer ND9C

Overall view

4 5
2 6
3
1

8
7

1 Presenter (illustration shows the 40 mm model)


2 Cutter
3 Thermal printing unit
4 Paper drive
5 Paper supply
6 Electronic box
7 Paper-low sensor – weekend sensor
8 Manual paper feed

7-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Views of thermal printer ND9C

Individual modules

1 Lever for lifting thermal head


2 Paper entry

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-19


Views of thermal printer ND9C Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

3
2
4
1

1 Presenter (Illustration shows the 120 mm model)


2 Operator keys
3 Display (LED)
4 Paper supply

7-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Views of thermal printer ND9C

1 2

1 Lever for adjusting paper-low sensor and weekend sensor


2 Position core Ø

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-21


Views of thermal printer ND9C Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

1 Power supply connector


2 Master-slave interface connector (without function)
3 V.24 / RS232 connector
4 USB connector (without function)

7-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Views of needle printer ND9E

Views of needle printer ND9E

Overall view

4 5 2

8
3

7
6 1

1 Chassis
2 Electronic box
3 Paper supply
4 Paper input
5 Paper width adjustment
6 Needle printing unit
7 Cutter
8 Presenter (illustration shows the 40 mm model)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-23


Views of needle printer ND9E Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Individual modules

2 4

1 6

1 Lever for adjusting the paper-low sensor and the weekend sensor
2 Paper-low sensor (PVE)
3 Weekend sensor (PWE)
4 Paper roll holder
5 Notch for paper roll
6 Position core Ø

7-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Views of needle printer ND9E

2 3
4

1 Print table
2 Carrier
3 Ribbon holder
4 Print head

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-25


Views of needle printer ND9E Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

1 Sensor presenter input (PrE)


2 Manual drive
3 Sensor presenter output (PrA)
4 Drive

7-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9C)

Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9C)

Paper path
PE Paper out detector (middle)
PWE Paper weekend sensor

MK2 Mark detection 2 (rh)


MK1 Mark detection 1 (lh)

TOF Top of form detector


PVE Paper-low sensor

PrA Presenter output


PrE Presenter Input
Receipt output

LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LS6
LS7
LS8

Long presenter: The photosensor LS8 is located at the appropriate position at


the exit.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-27


Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9E) Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9E)

path Paper
BOF Bottom of form detector (middle)
PWE Paper weekend sensor

MK2 Mark detection 2 (rh)


MK1 Mark detection 1 (lh)

TOF Top of form detector


PVE Paper-low sensor

PrA Presenter output


PrE Presenter Input
Receipt output

LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LS6
LS7
LS8

Long presenter: The photosensor LS8 is located at the appropriate position at


the exit.

7-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Paper path, position of photosensors (ND9E)

Paper path monitoring

Paper-low sensor PVE: The photosensor LS1 detects the paper low
indicator mark on the paper. The photosensor is
placed at the paper roll holder.
Weekend sensor PWE: The photosensor LS2 detects that the paper
supply is insufficient for a weekend. The
photosensor is placed at the paper roll holder.
End-of-paper sensor The photosensor LS5 detects that the paper
PE: supply is completely used up. It is used for
automatic feeding in of the paper. The
photosensor is placed at the paper feed unit.
Top-of-form sensor: The photosensor LS6 controls the paper feed to
ToF the cutter and to the first print position. The
photosensor is placed at the paper feed unit.
Mark detection: The photosensors LS3 and LS4 are used for mark
MK 1, MK 2 controlling.
The photosensors are placed on the left and right
edge. The right sensor is adjustable, the left
sensor is fixed.
Presenter input PrE: The photosensor LS7 is used to control the paper
path through the presenter. The photosensor is
placed at the presenter entry.
Presenter output PrA: The photosensor LS8 is used to control the paper
path through the presenter. The photosensor is
placed at the presenter exit.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-29


Status indicators Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Status indicators
The status of the receipt printer is displayed by 3 LEDs.

Meaning of LEDs

Colour Function
Green: Online/Ready
Yellow: Paper low/end of paper
Red: Malfunction (when flashing)

Indicators when online

Green Yellow Red Meaning


1 X 0 No error
1 Flashing 0 End of paper
1 1 0 Paper low
1 0 1 Data in buffer
Flashing 0 0 Data transfer
1 0 0 No data

Meaning:
0 = Off
1 = On
x = 0 or 1

7-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Status indicators

Indicators in case of malfunction

Green Yellow Red Meaning


1 1 1 Hardware problem (fatal)
1 0 Flashing ND9C: Not used
ND9E: no home position (carrier)
0 0 Flashing Paper feed error
0 1 Flashing ND9C: Error during print output
ND9E: no clock signal (carrier)
1 1 Flashing Cutter error
Flashing Flashing Flashing ND9C: Thermal line over temperature
ND9E: Print head over temperature

Indicators in test mode

Green Yellow Red Meaning


Flashing Flashing Flashing Test mode (selection level)

Meaning:
0 = Off
1 = On
x = 0 or 1

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-31


Key functions at power up Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Key functions at power up


When switching on the printer (e. g. by connecting the V 24 plug) some special
settings can be executed with certain keys before the mechanical initialisation
starts.

Pressed keys Function


None Normal turn-on characteristics of the printer.
TEST The internal test will be switched on.
FEED Forms control is enabled using mark detection.
TEST+FEED Parameters are set to standard values, EEPROM is
saved.

7-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Key functions in normal operation

Key functions in normal operation


By pressing keys during normal operation of the printer it is possible to give
some functions a higher priority.
Pressed key Function
None None
TEST None
FEED Paper feed by 1/6 inch. If the key is pressed for more
than 2 seconds, the continuous paper feed will start
until the key combination is changed.
TEST+FEED Initiates a paper feed-in.

The key functions start functions of the machine control via a spontaneous
order channel. These functions are assigned a higher priority than the
functions of the emulation. During operation the user should not interfere with
or change the emulation functions by executing key functions.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-33


Internal test – key functions Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Internal test – key functions


After switching on the internal test (see section "Internal test") the selection
mode is activated. By pressing the keys the internal test can be controlled.

Pressed key Mode Function


TEST Selection mode: If the key is pressed for less than 2
seconds, the execution mode will be
switched on and the test function will be
started (if valid). If the key is pressed for
more than 2 seconds, the test mode will
be turned off.
Execution mode: The selection mode is turned on and the
test function is turned off.
FEED Selection mode: Increment selection of test function.
Execution mode: None
TEST+FEED None

7-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Internal test

Internal test
The print controller provides a test program divided into different test levels.
This program facilitates the check of the main printer functions.
The test mode is started when the ’Test’-button is pressed when the printer will
be switched on.
The controller disables the interface when starting the internal test. After
termination of the internal test the printer is initialised, the interface is re-
enabled and the ’power failure’ message is issued.
The test levels 1 to 4 are general test functions which can be helpful in
diagnosing a fault.
The test levels 5 to 7 use functions of the emulation and can only be selected
and executed when paper has been loaded. Test levels 5 and 6 turn the mark
control off and test level 7 turns the mark control on. This setting is not saved.
When the test mode is terminated, the firmware is restarted and a complete
initialisation performed.
Automatic paper feeding in the test mode is not possible. When paper sensors
are tested, a feed in operation is started when paper is detected in paper out
condition at PE (LS5). Feeding is suppressed, because no initialisation of the
device control is carried out when the test mode is started, and thus paper
feeding is not enabled.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-35


Displaying the test level Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Displaying the test level


In the selection mode (LEDs are flashing), the LEDs show the selected test
level in binary code when the feed-button is pressed. The LEDs have following
significance:

LED Significance
Red 4
Yellow 2
Green 1

Binary displaying test level

Red Yellow Green Test level Marking


0 0 1 1 Paper sensors (PE/PVE/PWE)
0 1 0 2 Paper sensors (MK1/MK2)
0 1 1 3 ND9C: NOP
ND9E: Carrier-sensors
1 0 0 4 ND9C: NOP
ND9E: Carrier
1 0 1 5 Cutter/Presenter
1 1 0 6 Print test
1 1 1 7 Mark control

Meaning
0 = Off
1 = On

7-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Description of the test programs

Description of the test programs

Test level 1 (Paper sensor 1)


In this test level the paper out, paper low and paper weekend sensors are
indicated after their actuation. The order of actuation is not specified.
The operating state of the photosensors are indicated by LEDs of the internal
indicator panel.

LED Function
Green Paper out (PE)
Yellow Paper low status (PVE)
Red Paper weekend sensor (PWE)

Test level 2 (Paper sensor 2)


In this test level the ToF, left-margin-mark and right-margin-mark are indicated
after their actuation. The order of actuation is not specified.
The operating state of the photosensors is displayed by LEDs.

LED Function
Green ToF
Yellow Mark on left (MK1)
Red Mark on right (MK2)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-37


Description of the test programs Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Test 3 (Test carrier-sensors) (only ND9E)


In this test level, the two sensors for home position and timing are indicated
after their actuation. The actuation is made by moving the carrier drive by
hand. The operating state of the sensors is indicated by LEDs.

LED Function
green Home position
yellow Timing T1
red Timing T2

Test 4 (Test carrier) (only ND9E)


The carrier is moved back and forth in this test, causing the home position and
timing sensors to be indicated. The operating state is of the sensors by LEDs.

LED Function
green Home position
yellow Timing T1
red Timing T2

7-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Description of the test programs

Test level 5 (Cutter/Presenter)


In this test level the paper is fed for about 100 mm (receipt length), cut off with
the cutter and put out via the presenter. Then the paper is retracted to the 1st
print position. The operating state of the photosensors is indicated by LEDs.

LED Function
Green Cutter home position
Yellow Presenter input sensor (PrE)
Red Presenter output sensor (PrA)

Test level 6 (Print test)


In level 6 follows the configuration print takes place.
After this, 20 lines with the sign ’H’ will be printed, to check the symmetry of the
print diagram.
The next action is to print a test staircase to check the printer unit. After that,
the line feed will be tested by giving out 6 lines with 6 lpi. At the end, the
standard character set will be printed in 4 different character pitches.
Afterwards the paper is fed out with normal receipt length, cut off with the
cutter and put out via the presenter. Then the paper is retracted to the 1st print
position. In case of paper with marks, this marks will be used for controlling the
receipt length. The test is terminated automatically after one run (return to the
test selection without message).
For this test, paper must be inserted, or the program will return to the test
selection level without a message.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-39


Description of the test programs Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Test level 7 (Mark control)


This test level is used to check the mark control. The printer prints the text "1st
print position" at the 1st print position and then performs a formfeed, FF. The
FF looks for the next mark, the paper is then transported to the cutter, cut off
and put out via the presenter. The paper is automatically fed backwards to the
1st print position.

Malfunctions:
In the case of an error test levels, which use functions from the emulation (print
output, paper positioning), are no longer practicable. Activated test levels will
be closed in case of an error. The program is in the error handling routine,
which can only be terminated by switching the power supply off/on. Test levels
that request the photosensors can be used in case of an error.

7-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Paper controlling

Paper controlling

Procedure of Paper controlling


The device control can move the paper in two ways:
1. A paper feed is executed by a number of motor steps and is not dependent
on the state of any paper sensors. No paper feeding error can be detected
during this type of feed operations. Paper feeds are for example initiated by
LF from the application.
2. Paper positioning is carried out to move to special positions in the printer
(cutting position, print position, receipt output in the presenter). The device
control positions the paper dependent on the status of the paper sensors.
Paper positioning is started, for example, by commands (formfeed, eject,
feed-in) from the emulation to the device control. Only the device control
knows the exact positions.

In the printer, the PE and ToF photosensors are used for positioning. The PrE
and PrA photosensors are used in the presenter. Paper feeding is carried out
exclusively by the stepper motor for feeding in the printer. When the paper
reaches the presenter, the stepper motor in the presenter is driven in addition.
When the paper is ejected after a cut, only the stepper motor in the presenter
is driven.
The minimum paper length which is cut off at feeding in and the minimum
distance of the marks on the paper has to be so large that secure paper
feeding in the printer is always ensured.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-41


Paper controlling Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Mark detection
The marks on the paper are detected with enabled mark control and enabled
mark detection during paper forward feeding. If the paper is fed backwards
with mark detection enabled, a function-disabled counter for mark detection is
incremented for this distance. As long as a value is in the function-disabled
counter, no mark detection is carried out. Thus, the furthest selected mark is
always used for synchronisation. When mark detection is enabled, the two
photosensors MK1 and MK2 are activated for mark monitoring, with the
photosensor MK1 being given the highest priority. When the beginning of the
mark is securely detected by a photosensor, the other photosensor is switched
off. Synchronisation on a mark takes place when the rear mark edge is
detected. If the length of a mark is exceeded, an error message ‘mark error’ is
issued, and the mark detection disabled. The mark is on the printable side of
the receipt.

7-42 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Reset when switching on

Reset when switching on


When the printer is switched on, mark detection is disabled. When there is no
paper in the printer, the reset procedure will be stopped. Paper reset is then
performed by automatic feeding in. If paper is in the printer in front of the ToF
photosensor, the paper is advanced at normal paper feeding speed beyond
the ToF photosensor. The function is continued depending on the setting of the
mark control. If paper is in the printer behind the ToF photosensor, the paper is
fed backwards at the normal paper feeding rate until it reaches the ToF
photosensor. If no change of the photosensor is detected after the max. eject
distance, a feed error is indicated. In the positive case the paper is positioned
to the 1st print line.

Reset when switching on without mark control


After passing the ToF photosensor, the paper is fed backwards until the
leading edge of the paper is detected by the ToF photosensor. The paper is
then positioned on the 1st print line.

Reset when switching on with mark control


Resetting to the print position is similar to the resetting procedure without mark
control. The mark detection is enabled when the print position is reached. A
synchronisation on the next mark takes place only with FF, feeding in by
pressing the appropriate button or enabling the mark control.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-43


Reset when switching on Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Reset when feeding in


A reset by feeding in is started if paper is detected at the PE photosensor while
the printer is empty or if feeding in is requested by button operation (test and
line feed).
In the feed-in operation, the paper is transported to the ToF photosensor at
slow speed and with mark detection disabled. The function is continued
depending on the setting of the mark control. The following paper feed
operations are carried out at a normal paper transport rate.
If the paper is reset properly with the 1st print position to the print position, no
errors and no mark errors, the emulation goes into online status and the status
information will be deleted.

Reset at feed-in without mark control


After reaching the ToF photosensor the paper is fed forward until a paper
section with the minimum length can be obtained. The paper is cut off and the
section is transported out through the presenter. The paper in the printer is fed
backwards until the leading edge of the paper is detected at the ToF
photosensor. The paper is placed on the 1st print line then.

7-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Reset when switching on

Reset at feed-in with mark control


After positioning to the ToF photosensor, mark detection is enabled and
forward paper feeding is started. When synchronising on a mark, this mark is
fed to the print position. With mark detection disabled, the paper is then fed to
the cutting position, the paper is cut and the section is fed out by the presenter.
The paper in the printer is fed backwards until the leading edge of the paper is
detected by the ToF photosensor. Then the paper is positioned to the 1st print
line. At the print position, the mark detection is re-enabled.
If, after the enabling of the mark detection, no synchronisation on a mark takes
place (paper without marks) and no paper feed error has occurred, mark error
is indicated and the feed-in function continues.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-45


Formfeed Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Formfeed
With unprinted data, a print release is carried out. If both the print position and
the line position are on the margin of the 1st line (ToF), the command is
ignored. Whether the function is continued depends on the setting of the mark
control. After finishing the paper feed, the new forms length is set and the
position in the form is on the first print line on the left margin.

Formfeed without mark control


The distance from the current position in the form up to the end of the form is
calculated and the calculated length of paper is transported forward at normal
transport speed. Then the paper is fed from the print position to the cutting
position and the paper cut. The section is fed out by the presenter. The paper
in the printer is fed backwards until the leading edge of the paper is detected at
the ToF photosensor. The paper is then positioned to the 1st print line.

Formfeed with mark control


If a detected mark is in front of the print position, the mark is fed directly to the
print position. If the last mark detected is behind the print position or no mark
has been detected yet, the next mark is searched for and moved to the print
position. The paper is then transported with enabled mark detection from the
print position to the cutting position and cut.
The section is fed out via the presenter. The paper in the printer is fed
backwards until the leading edge of the paper is detected at the ToF
photosensor. The paper is then positioned to the 1st print line. At the print
position the mark detection is re-enabled.
If no synchronisation on a mark takes place when a new mark is searched for,
and no paper feed error has occurred, a mark error is indicated, and the
formfeed function continues.

7-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Mark control

Mark control

Switching on the mark control


With unprinted data, a print release is carried out. If the mark control has
already been enabled, the function is terminated without an error message. If
the mark control is in the disabled condition, it is now enabled, and mark
detection is also enabled. The next mark is searched for and fed to the print
position. With mark detection disabled, the paper is fed from the print position
to the cutting position, the paper is cut and the section is fed out by the
presenter. The paper in the printer is fed backwards until the leading edge of
the paper is detected at the ToF photosensor. Then the feeding from the ToF
photosensor to the print position is executed. At the print position, mark
detection is re-enabled. If the procedure has been completed without errors,
the mark control setting is saved in the parameter memory. If the procedure
has been finished with an error, the mark control and the mark detection are
disabled and the emulation goes into offline status.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-47


Mark control Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Disabling the mark control


If the mark control is in the disabled condition, the function is ignored. If it is in
the enabled condition, the mark control and the mark detection are disabled
and the setting is saved in the parameter memory. Paper feeding does not
take place.

Enabling the mark control when switching on


If, when the printer is switched on, the FEED button is pressed until the printer
initialisation starts, form control by mark detection is enabled. If possible, there
should be no paper in the printer at this time.
After the parameters have been loaded from the parameter memory, the
parameter setting for form control by marks is carried out and the parameters
are saved in the parameter memory. The printer behaves as if the setting of
the mark control is already available in the memory area.
Without paper in the printer, synchronisation on a mark will take place at the
next feed-in (automatic by inserting paper) (see "Reset at feed-in with mark
control"). If there is paper in the printer, automatic synchronisation on a mark
takes place at form feeding by the emulation or by a feed-in function on the
keypad (press TEST and FEED simultaneously while the printer is in
operation).
A deactivation of the mark control when switching on is only possible by setting
all parameters to default values.

7-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Eject

Eject
If there is no paper in the printer, the function is ignored. If there is paper in the
printer, the paper is fed backwards (maximum feeding length is the eject
length = 250 mm). When the leading edge of the paper is detected by ToF, the
distance from the ToF to the PE is moved in backward direction. Then the
printer waits until the paper is removed. The function is terminated if no paper
is detected. Then the printer is in the paper-out status and a new paper roll can
be loaded using the automatic feed-in feature.

Paper out

Physical paper out


If no paper is detected at the PE sensor any longer during cyclical monitoring,
paper out is defined and the status is reported internally. This internal
message is also sent when paper is removed manually after a paper feed
error. The internal message is retained until paper is fed in properly. An error
handling is not activated.
If the internal paper out message is present when the status is queried, paper
out is set in the status information.
If paper is detected at the PE sensor during the paper out status, automatic
feeding-in is started.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-49


Paper out Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Paper out during printing


If the device control unit detects the status paper out or no paper at the PE
sensor, during the start printing order, a serious error has occurred.
The print function is aborted and an error handling procedure for paper out
during printing is activated.
The status information indicates a loss-of-job error, user error and paper feed
error. The emulation is set offline.
The error handling procedure indicates the error on the indicator panel
(analogous with paper feed error). The error handling does not end
automatically.
The paper in the printer must be fed out manually by pressing the appropriate
button. Automatic paper feeding after manual removal of the paper is not
possible during this error handling. This is only possible after an initialisation of
the device control.

Paper out detection


The status of the PVE photosensor is reported to the host as paper out
message. The message is used to define the quantity of the paper supply.
When the message appears you can print at least another 210 mm, depending
on the setting of the PVE sensor. The message does not have any influence
on the paper control.

Paper low detection


The status of the PWE photosensor is reported to the host as paper low status.
The message is used to determine the last print job. The message does not
have any influence on the operation of the paper control.

7-50 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Mark errors

Mark errors
If a mark that is too large is detected at the mark detection, the mark error
status is internally indicated, and the mark detection is disabled.
If no mark is found when searching for a mark, the mark error status is
internally indicated and the mark detection remains active.
If the internal mark error status occurs with the feed-in or formfeed functions,
mark error is entered in the status information and the emulation is set offline.
Error handling is not activated.

Error handling
During an error handling procedure, the device control is disabled for
commands from the emulation. Starting functions in the device control via the
keypad is possible.
When an error handling is started, the emulation is switched offline and all
edited print data is lost. This is necessary because an emulation function can
be blocked while waiting for a free bitmap, thus hindering further processing of
emulation commands.
If CANCEL or INIT is executed in the emulation during error handling, the
active error handling is terminated and the device control initialised according
to the switching-on procedure. Commands waiting in the job buffer for the
device control are destroyed during the initialisation.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-51


Pin assignment Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Pin assignment

Data connector

Pin Name I/O


1
2 RXD I
Serial data transmission from host to controller
Transmission of all print and control characters
3 TXD O
Serial data from controller to host
4 DTR O
Data set ready
5
6
7
8 CTS I
Processor ready to receive data
9 Ground

7-52 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Pin assignment

24 V connector

Pin Name
1 24 V
2 Ground

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-53


Technical data Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Technical data

Power supply
Supply voltage 24 V DC +/- 5 %
Connector AMP Mod I 2 pin.

Power input (ND9C)


Operating mode 24 V DC Typ. 1.2 A
Standby 24 V DC Typ. 0.14 A
Power peak 24 V DC Typ. 3.5 A

The printer has a integrated fuse.

Power input (ND9E)


Operating mode 24 V DC Typ. 1.8 A
Standby 24 V DC Typ. 0.15 A
Power peak 24 V DC Typ. 4 A

The printer has a integrated fuse.

7-54 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Paper specification

Service life

Printing unit ND9E

Print head: min. 100,000,000 characters


Printing unit: min. 5,000,000 lines

Thermal printing unit ND9C


Print head: 50 km

Paper specification
Paper width max. 82.5 mm
Roll diameter ND9C: up to 260 mm
ND9E: up to 1800 mm
Core diameter 11, 18, 25, 40 or 50 mm
Paper quality ND9C: TF50KS-E2C or equivalent
ND9E: Z100 / Recycling
Paper weight: ND9C: 60 to 90 g/m2
ND9E: 60 to 80 g/m2
Paper thickness 0.07 to 0.1 mm

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-55


Mark detection Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Mark detection
Mark position On print side (see drawing)
PCS value > 70 % acc. to DIN 66 236
Opacity (opaque) > 85 % acc. to DIN 53 146
Mark position On the left, on the right or both
Mark width ND9C: min. 5 mm, max. 8 mm
ND9E: < 8mm ± 1 mm
Scan sector ND9C: 4 mm on the left and on the right from the edge
ND9E: 4 mm ± 1 mm left and on the right from the edge
Height of mark 3 to 10 mm
Mark on the left Firmly
Mark on the right Firmly
Inhibited zones for ND9C: 8.0 mm on the right / on the left
forms ND9E: 8.4 mm on the right / on the left
Paper width Max. 82.5 mm

7-56 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Mark detection

Mark position (ND9C)

4
Scan area
Front edge
Cutting edge
4.23

1st. print line


mm

left max.print area 66.5/98 mm right


margin 8.0 mm 8.0 mm margin

max. paper width 82.5/114 mm

Print directon

Mark on the printing side


is virtually adjustable to the
cutting edge
4.23

last line
mm

Paper width 114 mm is cancelled.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-57


Mark detection Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

Mark position (ND9E)

4
Scan area
Front edge
Cutting edge
4.23

1st. print line


mm

left max.print area 65.7 mm right


margin 8.4 mm 8.4 mm margin

Transport direction

Mark on the printing side


is virtually adjustable to the
cutting edge
4.23

last line
mm

7-58 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E Ribbon cartridge (only ND9E)

Ribbon cartridge (only ND9E)


Cassette Bar cassette
Ribbon Nylon
Width 13 mm
Colour purple (standard),
black (optional)
Model No. purple: part no. 80980980
Part Name: INK RIBBON CARTRIDGE C300P
black: part no. 80981610
Part Name: INK RIBBON CARTRIDGE C300P
Productivity purple: 6 million character
black: 1.6 million character
Drive trough carrier-drive

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 7-59


Ribbon cartridge (only ND9E) Receipt Printer ND9C / ND9E

7-60 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Introduction
The various SAT-2X00 models (Frontload / Rearload) and a variable number
of dispenser modules (1 or 2 with 2 cassette slots each or dispenser module
with 1 cassette slot) means that every user can choose the right version of the
device for his needs. The SAT 2X00 is only used in indoor automatic teller
machines.

Each note is checked within the SAT 2X00 after withdrawal. Detected faults,
e.g. double dispensing or note too narrow/ too wide, are corrected internally.

The AZM cash-out module of the SAT 2X00 is operated by means of the
standard V.24 interface (DIN 66 348 / ISO 7498).

The V.24 line can be operated with encryption. The decision to use of this
security option is left to the operator.

The controller of the AZM SAT 2X00 is equipped with a bootstrap loader that
enables the control program matching the device version to be loaded.
The SAT 2X00 AZM can be loaded with the firmware on installation with a
program on hard disk and a PC. The advantage of loadable firmware is that
there is no need for an engineer call-out when changes are required (PROM
replacement).
Firmware ‚AZM_FL_‘.BIN‘ must be loaded for the SAT 2X00 cash-out
module.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-1


Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out moduleCash-out module with SAT 2X00

Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out module


The dispenser for indoor automatic teller machines consists of the following
components:

− Up to two dual dispenser modules placed one above the other; the central
cash-out controller is located on these.
− The collecting tray, including the reject/retract cassette, is above the
dispenser modules.
The collecting tray is still in the safe area.

− The cash-out module is contained in the top of the automatic teller


machine.
The cash-out module is different for Frontload and Rearload models.

8-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out module

The position of the modules and assemblies can be seen in the following
diagram:

Stacker

Tresor (wall thickness)

Reject/Retract Collecting tray


cassette

Central
Cash-out Cassette
Controller
Dual dispenser module 1

Cassette

Cassette

Dual dispenser module 2

Cassette

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-3


Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out moduleCash-out module with SAT 2X00

Rearload

Direction of cash output, Rearload

Stacker
Safe wall

Collecting tray RR cassette

MDMS ZAC II
Cassette 1
Central
Cash-out
Controller Cassette 2

Cassette 3
Dispenser module 2
Cassette 4

8-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00Structure of the SAT 2X00 cash-out module

Frontload

Direction of cash output, Frontload

Stacker

Safe wall
Collecting tray
RR cassette

MDMS ZAC II
Cassette 1
Central
Cash-out
Controller Cassette 2

Cassette 3
Dispenser module 2
Cassette 4

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-5


Central cash-out controller (ZAC) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Central cash-out controller (ZAC)

Assignment of ZAC

4
1
5
14

1 Battery jumper
2 Reset jumper
3 Function button
4 Status display (two 7-segment displays, 1st position uppermost)
Example: Status message ‘14’

5 Jumper panel 1 – 14

8-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Central cash-out controller (ZAC)

Battery jumper
The battery jumper must be connected when the controller is in use.

Reset jumper
Device initialization!
Connecting this jumper momentarily causes all hardware-specific
parameters (photosensors, pressure sensors, reference values for
banknotes, counters) to be deleted.
The cash-out cassettes must be removed before the reset jumper is
connected.
The reference values for the notes must then be re-recorded.

Assignment of the function button


When the function button is pressed on the ZAC central cash-out controller ,
test sequences can be started and the cash-out module can be reset. To start
a test function, the cash-out module must be in normal mode. The status
display then shows “00”. Pressing and holding down the function key causes
the status display to change successively to displays 1, 2 and 3. The
significance of these displays is shown in the following table. To start a
particular sequence, release the button when the status display shows the
relevant value.
The functions described below can only be carried out when the
safety isolation switch (cash-out module in cash-out position).
Functions 2 and 3 may only be activated in normal mode (display
“00”) or after it has been ensured that all transport paths are free.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-7


Central cash-out controller (ZAC) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Display Function Description of function


00 Normal mode -
1 RESET Start-up cash-out module with status display
‘—‘ (approx. 10 sec.). If an error is detected
that hinders or threatens the operational
readiness of the cash-out module (dirty
photosensors), the relevant error or a warning
is then indicated on the status display.
This test function is identical with the start-up
when the cash-out module is inserted into
dispensing position (close the safety isolation
switch).
2 Overall test In this test the mechanical components of the
+ RESET cash-out module are activated in sequence.
Any errors detected are shown on the status
display. The lifting magnets for the retaining
shaft and the electromagnetic clutch can only
be subjected to a visual function test in this
case. If no errors are detected during the test,
a RESET is then carried out.
3 Test dispensing + In this test the cash paths and the dispensing
RESET function of all installed cassettes containing
banknotes are checked: two banknotes are
withdrawn from the top cassette and one note
is withdrawn from each of the other cassettes;
these are then transported by the collecting
tray to the wait position (shutter remains
closed) and then to the reject compartment.
Any errors detected are shown on the status
display. If no errors are detected in this
function, a RESET is then carried out.

8-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Central cash-out controller (ZAC)

Jumper settings
Table 1:
Jumper no. Open Closed
1 odd Parity even Parity
2 19200 Baud 9600 Baud
3 Parity No Parity
4 Dispenser module
5 See table 2
6 front load rear load
7 No horizontal transport Horizontal transport facility
facility available available
8 No shutter available Shutter available
9 Ignore door sensor when Do not ignore door sensor when
encryption used encryption used
10 No Z module available Z module available
11 For dispensing modules
see table 2
12 For variant see table 3
13 For variant see table 3
14 Reserve

Jumper 1 is located on top of the controller board.


i
Default settings
This jumper assignment is mandatory for cash-out module SAT 2X00.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-9


Central cash-out controller (ZAC) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Table 2:
Number of dispenser Jumper no.4 Jumper no.5 Jumper no.11
modules
1 dispenser module open open closed
2 dispenser modules open open open
3 dispenser modules open closed closed
4 dispenser modules open closed open
5 dispenser modules closed closed open
6 dispenser modules closed open open
Reserve closed open closed
Reserve closed closed closed

Table 3:
Jumper no.12 Jumper no.13
No variant open open
Scope extension * closed open
IBM 4733i Emulation * open closed
Reserve closed closed

* in planning

8-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Function principle

Mode of operation of cash-out module SAT 2X00 and new


MDMS II

General information
The central cash-out controller (ZAC) controls the whole hardware of cash-out
module SAT 2X00 and of the new mechanical thickness measuring station
(MDMS II) as well as communication with the superordinate system unit.
The control program (firmware) must be loaded in the controller. The
advantage of loadable firmware is the fact that there is no need to call out an
engineer to make changes (PROM replacement).
The controller of cash-out module SAT 2X00 is equipped with a bootstrap
loader that can be used to load the control program associated with the
relevant version of the device.
After power-on, a power-up test (PUT) and a self-test are used to check the
central cash-out controller and the functioning of the entire dispenser in
several steps. Malfunctions are shown on a 2-digit status display on the central
cash-out controller.
The control program in the controller ensures that the total number of notes to
be dispensed does not exceed the device-specific maximum value of 60
banknotes. It withdraws banknotes from the various cassettes in accordance
with the given distribution of notes.
The distributed notes are transported by the MDMS into the uppermost
dispenser module. Banknotes found to be faulty (e.g. double dispensing, note
too narrow/ too wide) are detected by the MDMS and are subjected to a
special procedure (see “Detection of double dispensing and width
measurement with MDMS II“).
Correctly dispensed notes are collected into a bundle in order to be paid out to
the customer by means of the stacker after dispensing.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-11


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Photosensor amplifier
The cash transport paths in cash-out module SAT 2X00 are monitored by
photosensors. The current and amplification values of each photosensor are
set by means of controlling microprocessors.
The photosensor program stores the current and amplification values for each
photosensor in the buffered RAM. When the SAT 2X00 cash-out module is
started for the first time, the current and amplification values for all
photosensors must be determined.
When the photosensors are initialized in this way, the associated current and
amplification values are stored in a reference table.
The current and amplification values are stored in a second table, the working
table, when adjustments are made to current requirements.
The reference table is not changed when adjustments are made. The work
table and reference table can be used to determine the change in the
photosensors over time since initialization.
Initialization always takes place automatically when no tables as yet exist. This
may be the case when the central cash-out controller is switched on for the
first time of when the tables do not match the device type set at power-on, e.g.
the tables belong to a two-way cash-out module and the jumper settings for
the central cash-out controller are for a four-way-cash-out module.
For initialization purposes it is necessary for all photosensors to be available
and free. This is the only way to ensure that the right current values are
determined and used.
When a photosensor is covered, initialization is not carried out and an error is
reported. If a photosensor is partially occluded during initialization, or if the
current value detected is too high , then no error is detected and the value is
used until the next adjustment.
Every photosensor is operated with its associated current and amplification
value, so that a fixed set reception level is reached when the cabinet is open. If
this level is undershot by a certain amount due to aging and/or dirt, then the
photosensor is reported to be “occluded”.

This is why all photosensors are adjusted at regular intervals.


It is ensured that no semi-occluded photosensors are adjusted because the
current and amplification values found when measuring occluded
photosensors are far too high.

8-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Adjustment is carried out in the following circumstances:


− Every time operational voltage is established after the cash paths have
been cleaned

− After every reset (job or function button)


− Approx. every 3 minuets in idle mode when the device is on
To prolong the service life of the send LEDs, the photosensors are only
switched on for the duration of a device operation (dispensing or transport).
The photosensors are checked in a fixed sequence of intervals.

Reject/retract behavior
The retract behavior of cash-out module SAT 2X00 should correspond to that
of cash-out module-NG and not that of the ProCash Compact. A major
distinction should be drawn between ‘Retract’ and ‘Retract and Quit’.
The ‘Retract’ function is mainly used in banking applications. In this function,
the retracted cash is stored in the retract compartment. It is possible to
execute the function several times in succession (application). This means that
the retracted cash of several bank customers can be collected in the retract
compartment of the reject/retract cassette.
In the case of applications in which the ‘Retract and Quit’ function is also used,
it should be assumed that an operator is used after this command. The
machine goes out of order after this function. As a rule, two retracts have taken
place in this case and the retracted cash has been stored in such a way that it
can be assigned to customers. In the case of cash-out module NG, one
retracted amount would be located in the retract compartment, while the
second retract would be between the belts in the horizontal transport facility.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-13


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

In the case of the SAT 2X00, the first retract is also located in the retract
compartment, while the second retract is transported to the collecting tray. The
notes can thus only be removed by opening the door (1 x from retract
compartment, 1 x from stacker collecting tray).
In the case of the SAT 2X00, the retract compartment can hold up to 60 bank
notes (retract with 60 notes function). Up to 60 notes can be transported to the
stacker table using the ‘Retract and Quit’ function.
In the case of the bundle reject/ retract, a distinction is generally made
between bundles with n > 30 notes and n ≤ 30 notes. The reject/ retract
sequence is controlled by the firmware as follows (see also the “Overview of
sensors and electro-mechanical components” section):

Bundle with n > 30 banknotes:


− If this has not already happened, the bundle of notes is transported to the
cash-out area until photosensor L28 is occluded.
− The bundle is fanned out by reverse transport (differential speed between
the upper and lower belts). Photosensor L28 is uncovered at the start. The
bundle is transported backwards until photosensor L21 in the reject/retract
cassette inlet is occluded. During this procedure, the number of steps of
stepper motor SM4 is recorded. If the number of steps exceeds a limiting
value, then it is assumed that the bundle is not yet sufficiently fanned out.
The bundle is then once again transported to L28 and again fanned out
through reversing. This shuttling is repeated up to three times (condition for
cancellation: limiting number of steps undershot).

Bundle with n ≤ 30 banknotes:


− In this case the bundle is only fanned out once by reversing. When the
bundle is subsequently transported to the reject/ retract cassette, SM4 and
M1 continue to run until L21 is free again.

8-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

After a retract (condition: L21 is free) M1 (which drives the feed rollers)
i should continue to run for 500 ms after the retract magnet has dropped,
so as to push any notes in front of it into the retract compartment. This
allows the compartment to drop down fully. Any necessary reject is not
impeded by notes in front of the compartment.
After a reject with n > 30 banknotes (condition: L21 is free) M1 should
also continue to run. At the same time, the retract magnet should be
activated briefly twice to enable notes in the back area of the retract
compartment to be removed.

Detection of double dispensing and width measurement with MDMS II


The SAT 2X00 does not have a single reject deflector. This means that
individual notes cannot be separated, as is the cash with cash-out module NG.
Nonetheless, in order to keep the reject rate at a low level, the SAT 2X00 is
only configured together with a mechanical thickness measurement station
(MDMS II). The MDMS II can differentiate between one, two or more than two
banknotes.
Thus, the MDMS II is used to check the dispensed banknotes in cash-out
module SAT 2X00. This is located in the uppermost dispensing unit. In
addition, the distance between the various banknotes is also measured. The
banknotes are measured in the MDMS II by means of two Hall sensors. These
are each positioned opposite a magnet at a distance of 40 mm. The Hall
sensors are linked with a non-magnetic spring plate using Outsert technology
(2 touching levers, 1 per sensor). A Flexprint connects the sensors with the
MDMS print. The spring plate presses against a guide finger (counter plate)
mounted on an injection molded aluminum cross arm with a force of approx.
1.3 Newtons per lever. This cross arm also holds the permanent magnets. The
banknotes glide between the spring plate and guide finger through the
thickness measurement facility. The spring plate and therefore the Hall
sensors are thereby activated, resulting in a measurement signal.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-15


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

The mean value of the measurements is compared with a reference value


determined during reference value initialization.
The expected threshold values for 1 and 2 banknotes from the determination
of reference values are compared with the voltage signal of the MDMS II. A
‘volume measurement’ takes place, based on the length and width of the
banknote. Thus, single and double dispensing transactions are detected and
processed securely.
The transport speed of the notes in the MDMS is about 1.2 m/sec.
This yields a theoretical width measurement with a precision of approx. +/-0.24
mm. Also to be taken into account are expected oblique feeding, mechanical
tolerances and the steepness of the measurement signal, so that a measuring
accuracy of approx. +/-1 mm can be achieved.

The faulty situations to be differentiated mainly appear as follows:


− Dispensing is generally aborted when the MDMS II reports faulty
dispensing (irrespective of the type of fault)(the clutch is opened, the
retaining magnet is energized).
− If the MDMS II does not return a clear result (number and width of the
notes) then a bundle reject is carried out. After this, a test note may be
dispensed in order to check whether the note transport path is free.
Dispensing is then repeated.
− A bundle reject is carried out when the MDMS II registers double
dispensing with the last note.
− A bundle reject takes place in the event of multiple dispensing (n > 2).

8-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

The following table describes the other conceivable errors and the relevant
firmware-related measures:

Fault Measure by firmware


Overlapping notes (no gap between the All notes are placed in a stacker
notes) wheel compartment

Not enough space between the notes The main drive mechanism is
(rear edge-front edge less than 90 mm; stopped, after which the subsequent
with a transport speed of 1.2 m/s and a notes are individually stored at low
stacker wheel activation time of 75ms) speed by means of the stacker wheel.
A bundle reject takes place.

Cassette handling and function / low cash sensor


After cash-out module SAT 2X00 has entered operation, the cassette
EEPROMs are read out. This information is used to decide whether or not a
cassette is available.
Handling instructions ensure that all cassettes are removed at initial start-up.
The minimum value of the pressure sensor is determined. When the cassette
is then inserted, the stack of notes is moved until the pressure sensor reaches
its maximum value. These two values are then stored as reference values
(min./max. pressure) in the CMOS area.
If cassettes are exchanged during operation, then the relevant parameters are
adjusted as required.
If a cassette has been inserted correctly, this is confirmed with an acoustic
signal.
During dispensing, pressure is adjusted in proportion to the number if
dispensed notes by means of the pressure motor.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-17


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

The cassettes can be fitted with an optional so-called low-cash sensor.


In the case of this function, a
microswitch (1) may indicate that
there is only a certain number of
banknotes in the cassette
(microswitch (1) is located on the
underside of the module).

This number is toe be set by the


operator before the cassette is filled
in a range of approx. 0 – 500
banknotes by means of a mechanical
green slide mechanism (1).
The slide mechanism is located
inside in the floor of the cassette and
can be moved by hand.

If the slide is located directly on the pressure carriage (extreme left in


i the picture), then the microswitch is not activated.

Dispensing banknotes
Each dispenser module is assigned a dispensing photosensor.
Notes are dispensed from the bottom of the cassette by friction. A separator
immediately ensures that only one note reaches the transport facility.
The correct dispensing of a note is controlled by means of the dispensing
photosensor.

8-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Note jam during dispensing


If a note jam occurs, the transport motor is energized again after a short time.
Transportable notes are moved to the collecting position. After this, a note is
withdrawn from the bottom of the cassette and transported to the collecting
tray in order to check the cash path.

Banknote reaches the collecting position:


The transport path is free again when the banknote reaches the collecting
position. The original dispensing procedure is repeated after a bundle reject.

Banknote does not reach the collecting position:


The procedure is repeated twice. After that an error message is output, so that
the operator needs to check the cash path.

Cash transport
Cash transport is divided into dispensing, collecting and output operations.
The dispensing module dispenses notes from the cassettes and transports
them to the stacker; transport is monitored.
The MDMS II, where the notes are checked, is located on the uppermost
dispensing module.

The notes can be output after the required number of notes has been feed into
the collecting tray as a bundle. Banknote output is complete when the notes
have been removed.
Notes that have not been removed can be retracted and placed in the retract
compartment of the reject cassette in no particular order. The number of times
this happens is counted.
As an option, a bundle can be retracted and placed in the collecting tray of the
SAT 2X00. However, no further device operations are possible after this until
the bundle is removed by an operator and the disable is lifted by software
means.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-19


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Transport check
The transport path of the banknotes is monitored by photosensors from the
withdrawal of the notes to their output. The status of each photosensor is
determined cyclically.
Cleaning is necessary as soon as a photosensor becomes very dirty. Cleaning
can be carried out by the operator.

Output movement
When the cash bundle is output, the transport path to the customer or to the
reject compartment (bundle reject) is monitored by photosensors.
The transport job is confirmed as free of errors when the notes have reached
the removal position and all other monitoring photosensors are free again.

Note jam during output


If a note jam occurs, an attempt is made to clear the jam by energizing the
transport motor in both forward and reverse directions. If this is successful,
then the cash is output.
If the attempt to clear the jam fails, the cash remains on the transport facility
and the job is confirmed with an error.

8-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Main features of cash-out module SAT 2X00

General information
− Can be used in frontload or rearload machines.
− The withdrawal and transport speed during dispensing is approx. 6 notes
per second. Up to 60 notes can be collected and output.
− It is ensured that the cassettes can be inserted and removed in a definite
manner (acoustic signal when inserted).
− No adjustment is required, i.e. no electrical or mechanical adjustment is
needed after installation in the field.
− All banknote sizes currently released for cash-out module SAT 2X00 and
cash-out module NG can be handled (see “paper sizes” in this section).
− Combined operation with different currencies is possible (one type of note
per cassette).
− Banknotes are automatically placed in the correct compartment of the
reject/retract cassette when rejected or retracted.
− Standard interface V.24 (RS 232).
− There is a security function (DES) for line encryption.
− Power connection +24 V low-voltage.
− There is a connection for a security switch that ensures that cash-out
module SAT 2X00 is only ready to operate in the safe.
− User-friendliness and access for the operator were primary concerns; the
whole note path can be seen.
− There is a self-test option with error display. Errors are displayed and can
be evaluated by the operator; the messages are also made available to the
application.
− All states of cash-out module SAT 2X00 are stored in the buffered RAM of
the central cash-out controller. They can be called up at any time by means
of a SW job.
− Individual rejects are not permitted, double dispensing is detected and note
width is checked.
− The cassette can be emptied down to the last note (empty indicator).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-21


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

− Compact and modular form of the individual variants.


− There is no need to store spare parts for servicing cash-out module SAT
2X00 with the customer.
− Galvanically chromed sheet metal is used.

8-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Paper thickness/ weight


The permitted paper weights that can be processed by the SAT 2X00 are in a
range from 70 to 120 g/m2. This corresponds to a paper thickness of 0.08 to
0.12 mm.
If paper outside these specifications is to be processed, then these should be
checked for suitability in a separate test.

Paper sizes
The SAT 2X00 can handle banknote formats of the following dimensions:
Length: 54 to 92 mm
Width: 85 to 182 mm

If paper outside these specifications is to be processed, then these


i should be checked for suitability in a separate test.

Dimensions
Length: 2 way ~ 680 mm
4 way ~ 955 mm

Width: ~ 340 mm

Depth: Frontload ~ 610 mm


Rearload ~ 640 mm

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-23


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Functions of the various modules of cash-out module-


SAT 2X00

The central cash-out controller


The central cash-out controller monitors processes in the cash-out module.

The collecting tray and stacker (SAT 2X00)


The SAT 2X00 is located in the uppermost dispenser module. In both FL and
RL models it consists of a collecting tray and stacker module. The collecting
tray is identical in both cases, while the stacker differs in the FL and RL
models.

− SAT 2X00 Frontload:


Cash is output to the cassette insertion side of cash-out module SAT 2X00
(see the “Cash path description” section).

− SAT 2X00 Rearload:


Cash is output to the dispensing and transport side of cash-out module
SAT 2X00.

The SAT 2X00 collects perfect notes in the collecting station. Problematic
notes are placed in the reject/retract cassette by means of a bundle reject if is
there is no way to count and output them (see the “Detection of double
dispensing and width measurement with MDMS II” section).
A bundle from the collecting tray can be transferred to the following positions:
− Customer output cassette insertion side (Frontload cash dispensing)
− Customer output dispensing side (Rearload cash dispensing)
− Reject/retract cassette or reject box

8-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

A bundle of notes can be transported from the customer output position to the
retract compartment of the reject/retract cassette or into the collecting tray by
means of the retract function (see the “Reject/retract behaviour” and “Cash
transport” section)
The SAT 2X00 can handle bundles of up to 60 notes.
The bundle of notes can be transported at about 33 cm/sec, yielding a run-time
of about 3.5 to 4 sec from the collecting tray to the withdrawal position.
The bundle reject deflector is driven by a stepper motor.
The reject/retract cassette or reject box can simply be inserted into the SAT
2X00. It engages in final position and is locked. The cassette position is
checked by means of a switch. A lever on the SAT 2X00 is used to unlock the
cassette. The cassette is ejected approx. 1-2 cm from the stacker.

The cash path can be seen and is accessible throughout the collecting tray
and through the stacker.

The reject box and reject/retract cassette


The reject box is a simple, open box that can accommodate up toe 400 notes.

Two versions of the reject/retract cassette are available. Depending on the


version, they can be opened by means of a key or with a toggle. It is also
possible to affix a lead seal.

The reject/retract cassette contains two separate compartments in which the


banknotes can be inserted with the help of software. The compartment is
selected by means of a magnet in the SAT 2X00.
The reject box has a capacity of up to 400 notes, while the retract
compartment can accommodate up to 60 notes.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-25


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

The lockable reject/retract cassettes contain a re-insertion block. The status of


the re-insertion block can be recognized at a window in the backplane.
After the cover has been opened, the lockable cassette can only be inserted
into the SAT 2X00 once. The cassette is stopped at any subsequent attempt to
insert it. A display window on the back of the cassette indicates the locking
status:

green Cassette ready for insertion,


red Cassette must be opened before insertion.

The housing is made from welded sheet metal and the internal parts are made
from sheet metal and plastic. The insertion mechanism is installed from the
front.
The note is inserted obliquely from above to the front. A toothed wheel on the
right side of the cassette drives two feed rollers, one of which is spring-loaded.
Actuated by the spring, these rollers transport the individual notes or bundles
of notes into the cassette. The drive energy is drawn off by the SAT 2X00.
The feed area of the reject/ retract cassette is opened on insertion into the
SAT NG by means of side tappets that are moved in side panels in the SAT.
The cassette shutter is designed as a visor.
The cassette is unlocked in final position; a switch indicates when this position
is reached.
The two cassettes are released after being unlocked by hand.
To enable notes to be removed from the retract compartment, the
compartment can be swung into removal position by means of a lever when
the cassette cover is open.

8-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

The dispenser module


The description of the dispenser module can be found in the service
instructions for cash-out module NG.

The cash-out cassette


The description of the cash-out cassette is contained in the user guide.
The cash-out cassette can also be fitted with an optional low cash sensor (see
the “Cassette handling and functions / low cash sensor“ section).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-27


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Overview of sensors and electromechanical components

G11/G10 L28 L27

SM7

SM4

L21

SM6
M1 G4
G2 G8/G9
G1/G3
H6
SM1 SM5
L1 L18
S1

MDMS II
HR 1
RL 1
LKL 1
LAM 1
EK 1

HR 2
RL 2
LKL 2
LAM 2
EK 2

The overview of sensors and electromechanical components is based


i on the example of a Frontload model.
The designations also apply to the Rearload.

8-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle

Explanation of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
EKx Electromagnetic clutch (x = dispenser module item)
G Bifurcated photosensor
H Lifting magnet
HRx Lifting magnet retaining shaft (x = dispenser module item)
L Photosensor
LAMx Dispensing sensor (x = dispenser module item)
LKLx Cassette empty indicator (x = dispenser module item)
M Motor
MDMS II Mechanical thickness measurement station II
RLx Reflex photosensor (x = dispenser module item), Pressure
controller
S Switch
SM Stepper motor
STx Cassette connector (x = dispenser module item)

Characters Meaning
L1 Note counter, controls stacker wheel
L18 Notes in collecting tray
L21 Monitoring reject/retract
L27 Notes in output position, Frontload / Rearload
L28 Cash monitoring photosensor in 2X00 stacker
G1/G3 Bifurcated photosensor collecting tray in home position
G2 Bifurcated photosensor for stacker wheel position
G4 Position sensor for reject/retract cassette (next to H6)
G8/G9 Bifurcated photosensor 2X00 lifting cam in collecting tray in
home position/ note output
G10/G11 Bifurcated photosensor locking shutter open / closed
M1 Function 1 main drive motor for dispensing and collecting
notes
M1 Function 2 drive for drawing notes into the reject/ retract
cassette
H6 Lifting magnet, retract compartment
S1 Reject/retract cassette inserted switch
SM1 Stepper motor for driving the stacker wheel

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-29


Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Characters Meaning
SM4 Stepper motor for 2X00-stacker
SM5 Stepper motor for lifting cam drive in collecting tray
SM6 Stepper motor for collecting tray pressure rake
SM7 Stepper motor for locking shutter

8-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Description of cash path (Frontload)

Description of cash path (Frontload)

Cash-out

L28 L27
G10
G11

SM7

SM4

L21

5
SM6

G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4

S1

SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18

MDMS II

HR

RL
LKL
LAM

EK

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-31


Description of cash path (Frontload) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

− Dispensing of the required number of notes from the cassette. Drive force
provided by motor (M1). Controlled and monitored by the electromagnetic
clutch (EK), the dispensing sensor (LAM), the reflex photosensor (RL), the
photosensor for cassette empty signaling (LKL) and the lifting magnet
retaining cam (HR).
− Transport of the individual notes to the measuring station (MDMS II).
− The notes are placed on the lifting cam (3) in the collecting compartment
by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is provided by (L1) and
(L18).
− When all notes are in the collecting tray, the pressure fingers (2) are turned
onto the notes of the lifting cam by means of the motor (SM6). The
deflector (4) swings to output position and the guide fingers (5) turn
downwards. Controlled by (G1/G3).
− The drive momentum provided by the motor (SM5) causes the lifting cam to
move into the upper position in the collecting tray where the notes are
transferred to the already running additional transport facility and
transported to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− Open the shutter by means of a motor (SM7). Controlled by photosensor
(G10/G11).
− Transport the notes to the removal position under the photosensor (L27).
− Close the shutter after the cash has been removed.

8-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Description of cash path (Frontload)

Bundle retract when notes are not removed

L28 L27
G10
G11

SM7

SM4

L21

5
SM6

G1/G3 D 6
M1
G8/G9 4

E S1

SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18

MDMS II

HR

RL
LKL
LAM

EK

− The sequence is the same as for cash-out.


− The notes are not removed within the waiting time.
− Execution of the bundle retract.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-33


Description of cash path (Frontload) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

i The sequence for the bundle retract depends on application


programming.
There are two options/ sequences for bundle retract:
- Bundle retract to the retract compartment
- Bundle retract to the collecting tray

Bundle retract to the retract box


− The bundle is drawn back to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The shutter is closed.
− The bundle is transported to the retract compartment (a). Monitoring is by
means of photosensor (L21).

The device is once again ready to operate.


i

Bundle retract to the collecting tray


− The bundle is drawn back to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The shutter is closed.
− The bundle is transported to the collecting tray (b). Monitoring is by means
of photosensor (L18).
− The device sets the device block internally (status display 13) and goes
out of action.

8-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Description of cash path (Frontload)

Bundle reject

L28 L27
G10
G11

SM7

SM4

L21

5
SM6

G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4

S1

SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18

MDMS II

HR

RL
LKL
LAM

EK

− Dispensing of the required number of notes from the cassette. Drive force
provided by motor (M1). Controlled and monitored by the electromagnetic
clutch (EK), the dispensing sensor (LAM), the reflex photosensor (RL), the
photosensor for cassette empty signaling (LKL) and the lifting magnet
retaining cam (HR).
− Transport of the individual notes to the measuring station (MDMS II).
− The dispensing procedure is aborted if an error is detected. No more notes
are withdrawn from the cassette.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-35


Description of cash path (Frontload) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

− The faulty note or the last withdrawn note is placed on the lifting cam (3) in
the collecting tray by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is by
means of (L1) and (L18).
− When all notes are in the collecting tray, the pressure fingers (2) are turned
onto the notes of the lifting cam by means of the motor (SM6). The
deflector (4) swings to output position and the guide fingers (5) turn
downwards. Controlled by (G1/G3).
− The drive momentum provided by the motor (SM5) causes the lifting cam to
move into the upper position in the collecting tray where the notes are
transferred to the already running additional transport facility and
transported to a stop position above the deflector (4).
− The lifting cam (3) moves downwards. The deflector (4) and the retaining
finger (5) switch to reject position.
− The bundle is transported to the reject cassette. Monitoring is by means of
photosensor (L21).

8-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Description of cash path (Frontload)

Bundle reject from wait position

L28 L27
G10
G11

SM7

SM4

L21

5
SM6

G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4

S1

SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18

MDMS II

HR

RL
LKL
LAM

EK

− Dispensing of the required number of notes from the cassette. Drive force
provided by motor (M1). Controlled and monitored by the electromagnetic
clutch (EK), the dispensing sensor (LAM), the reflex photosensor (RL), the
photosensor for cassette empty signaling (LKL) and the lifting magnet
retaining cam (HR).
− Transport of the individual notes to the measuring station (MDMS II).
− The notes are placed on the lifting cam (3) in the collecting compartment
by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is provided by (L18).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-37


Error codes Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

− When all notes are in the collecting tray, the pressure fingers (2) are turned
onto the notes of the lifting cam by means of the motor (SM6). The
deflector (4) swings to output position and the guide fingers (5) turn
downwards. Controlled by (G1/G3).
− The drive momentum provided by the motor (SM5) causes the lifting cam to
move into the upper position in the collecting tray where the notes are
transferred to the already running additional transport facility and
transported to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The lifting cam (3) moves downwards. The deflector (4) and the retaining
finger (5) switch to reject position.
− The bundle is transported to the reject cassette. Monitoring is by means of
photosensor (L21).

Error codes
The texts corresponding to the error codes listed in this section do not match
those displayed on the monitor or operator panel in every case or with the
texts in the operating system specific error message manuals.
Because of the constructional differences between the standard-cash-out
module and the solution for the ProCash 2100 and ProCash 2000 systems, it
is not possible to provide a standard text for all solutions.
For this reason, the following texts have been specially written for the above-
mentioned systems.

8-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Start-up phase

Start-up phase
No. Meaning Reaction
Off No power supply Switch on device

Controller faulty Replace controller

Controller test after power None


on
(the displays flash and
change continuously)
Warning: Battery too weak Replace battery

Controller faulty Replace controller

Start firmware (RESET) None


Determine validity of -> Error 11
firmware -> Initialisation of
Check CMOS parameters photosensors -> CMOS
Errors L xx, 22
Test mechanical -> Errors 25 ... 28
components
Clearing run -> Errors 18,19, 29, 71..99

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-39


Start-up phase Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

No. Meaning Reaction


Error during photosensor Check and clear photosensor
xx initialisation after change of xx, try RESET again.
configuration or Replace module or controller if
replacement of controller necessary.
(the display alternates (See also table 6 - 2)
between ‘L’ and the
photosensor number ‘xx’)
Start-up complete without
error
Microcontroller None
burn / load FW
Comparison after load None

Successful loading of None


microcontrollers

8-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Normal mode
Error Meaning Explanation/Measures
code
Off No mains power supply Switch on
Power-up (after reset or Wait until power up is complete
electronic self-test) (approx. 10 sec.)

No error -

Software faulty Select ‘1’ on function button (reset)

Controller faulty When starting the cash-out module


the power-up test detected a serious
fault in the electronics of central cash-
out controller II. The controller must
be replaced.
Software missing Reload firmware
(download)

Safety switch open Close the safety switch (place cash-


out module in safe in cash-out
position).
Device block pending A retract has been carried out in
which the customer’s forgotten cash
is deposited in the collecting tray.
After this, all transport functions of the
cash-out module are blocked by
software means .
Remove the notes from the collecting
tray and then reset the device block
using the system software.
Cash-out module In order to operate, the cash-out
minimum configuration module requires at least one ready
missing cash-out cassette and the reject/
retract cassette.
Insert the reject/retract cassette and
filled cash-out cassette(s) and
register them using the system
software.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-41


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Cash jam during A cash jam was detected during
dispensing dispensing in the dispensing areas,
vertical transport facilities of the
dispenser modules or in the 2X00
stacker (photosensors LAMx, L18, L1 or
thickness sensor of mechanical
thickness measuring station MDMS II).
Check the cash path from the cassettes
to the collecting tray for jammed notes/
scraps.
Make sure the connectors to central
cash-out controller II or to the
photosensor elements fit correctly. Then
return the cash-out module to cash-out
position in the safe, thereby closing the
safety isolation switch and starting the
cash-out module again (reset). If the
status display continues to show ‘18’
after this start, then either the jam has
not been eliminated or another jam has
occurred.
Use the appropriate self-test program to
test the ‘Status of the Photosensors’
(DYK). If a photosensor (other than the
‘cassette empty’ photosensors’) is
registered as ‘occluded’, then determine
the cause and eliminate the fault.
If you cannot find a fault and ‘18’ still
appears after the next restart, then the
2X00 stacker, the relevant dispensing
unit or the controller should be replaced.

8-42 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Cash jam in the 2X00 A jam has been detected in the 2X00
stacker/ collecting tray stacker or in the inlet area of the reject
cassette. Remove all banknotes in the
cash path from the collecting tray to the
cash output or in the reject cassette
inlet.
Make sure the connectors to central
cash-out controller II or to the
photosensor elements and to the
electronics of the 2X00 stacker fit
correctly.
Then return the cash-out module to
cash-out position in the safe, thereby
closing the safety isolation switch and
starting the cash-out module again
(reset). If the status display continues
to show ‘19’ after this start, then either
the jam has not been eliminated or
another jam has occurred.
Use the appropriate self-test program
to test the ‘Status of the Photosensors’
(DYK). If one of the photosensors L18 -
L28 is registered as ‘occluded’, then
determine the cause and eliminate the
fault.
If you cannot find a fault and ‘19’ still
appears after the next restart, then the
2X00 stacker, the relevant dispensing
unit or the controller should be
replaced.
Thickness measurement The dispensing unit in the uppermost
station MDMS II faulty double dispensing module or the
controller must be replaced.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-43


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Photosensor Check all cash paths from the cassettes to the
amplifier is collecting tray, from the collecting tray to the cash
faulty or output and the inlet area of the RR cassette for
photosensor jammed notes/ scraps and remove these as
initialisation is necessary.
unsuccessful Then return the cash-out module to cash-out
position in the safe, thereby closing the safety
isolation switch and starting the cash-out module
again (reset). If the status indicator continues to
show ‘22’ after restart, then the controller must be
replaced.
Retract drive Empty the reject cassette (see the “Empty reject
mechanism cassette” section).
faulty / lifting Check that the retract compartment can move
magnet H6 within the reject cassette.
blocked Replace the 2X00 stacker or controller.
Dispensing It was not possible to bring the main motor (M1)
drive up to minimum speed after a short start-up
mechanism period. Check that the connector to central cash-
(M1) faulty/ out controller II fits correctly. Select ‘1’ (Reset) on
blocked the function button.
If the motor tries to start, but loud running sounds
can be heard: check the cash paths of the cash-
out module for a major cash jam. Check the inlet
to the reject/retract cassette for jammed notes.
Set the cash-out module in the safe to cash-out
position (security isolation switch closed) and
select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button after starting up the cash-out
module: monitor running sounds and the
transport function of the main motor.
If the main motor does not turn or if this test
function once again ends with status display ‘25’,
then the 2X00 stacker or the controller must be
replaced, otherwise the cash-out module cannot
be operated.

8-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Controller for Check the 2X00 stacker in the area of the
pressure rake collecting tray for jammed cash/ scraps and
of lifting cam remove these as necessary.
faulty/ blocked
Set the cash-out module in the safe to cash-out
(SM6 or SM5)
position (security isolation switch closed) and
select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button after starting up the cash-out
module: if this test function once again ends with
status display ‘26’, then the 2X00 stacker or the
controller must be replaced.
Shutter error Check the output area of the 2X00 stacker and
shutter for foreign matter that impede the
movement of the shutter flap.
Check that the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the electronics of the 2X00
stacker fit correctly.
Set the cash-out module to cash-out position
(security isolation switch closed).
Select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button and monitor the movement of the
shutter. It is safe to clear the shutter even while
the test function is running – then repeat test
function 2 without intervening in the movement of
the shutter. If this test again ends with status ‘28’,
then the 2X00 stacker or controller must be
replaced.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-45


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Output Check the note output area of the 2X00 stacker-
photosensor is and shutter for foreign matter that impede the
occluded function of the output photosensor.
(manipulation)
Check that the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the electronics of the 2X00
stacker fit correctly.
Set the cash-out module in the safe to cash-out
position (safety isolation switch closed) and select
‘1’ (Reset) wit the function button. If the status
display still shows ‘29’ after the cash-out module
has been started, then the 2X00 stacker or
controller should be replaced.

8-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Too many Bundle rejects are executed on the ProCash
bundle rejects 2X00 when the measuring station detects a faulty
x
(x=1-6) banknote. The cause may be banknotes that are
dispensed extremely obliquely or in an
uncontrolled manner, or photosensor faults.
This error can be ignored the first time it occurs
(warning). However, if this error has already
occurred several times, proceed as follows:
1.) Remove the cassette from dispenser module
‘x’ and check the banknote inset. Is the right type
of banknote in the cassette? Are the first notes
crumpled on one side? Is the pressure on the first
notes the same on both sides?
2.) With the cassette removed, check the
dispensing area in the dispensing module for
jammed scraps.
3.) Check the transport path from cassette ‘x’ to
the collecting tray for jammed cash/ scraps. Has
the transport belt run off the rollers?
4.) Check that the connectors to central cash-out
controller II and to the various photosensor
elements fit correctly.
5.) Check the correct lift of the magnet for the
retaining cam by pressing on the anchor (if
necessary check the movement of the magnet in
test function 2 (mechanical test).
6.) Determine the reference value.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-47


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Cash cannot be A) No cash could be dispensed from cassette
x dispensed or ‘x’ or
incorrect B) The required pressure could not be
pressure on established when inserting the cassette.
notes when Procedure in case A):
inserting a 1.) Remove cassette ‘x‘ and check the
cassette (x=1-6) banknote inset. The notes must be upright in
the cassette. Are the first notes very
crumpled? Curved notes should bend towards
the pressure carriage. Are the first notes stuck
or jammed together?
2.) When the cassette is removed, check the
dispensing area in the dispenser module for
jammed cash/ scraps.
3.) Check that the connectors to central cash-
out controller II and to the clutch on dispenser
module ‘x’ fit correctly.
4.) Then insert filled cassette into dispenser
module ‘x’ and select ‘3’ (test dispensing0 on
the function button with the safety isolation
switch closed. If this test again ends with error
code 4x, select test dispensing again and
check the function of the clutch and retaining
cam. If the clutch or retaining cam is not
activated, the dispensing unit or controller
must be replaced.
Procedure in case B):
1.) Remove cassette ‘x’ and check the
banknote inset.‘ The notes must be upright in
the cassette. Are the first notes very
crumpled?
Í Continued on the next page

8-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error code Meaning Explanation/Measures


Cash could not Curved notes should bend towards the
be dispensed or pressure carriage! If necessary, transfer
x
faulty note notes from the back of the cassette to the
pressure when front. If the stack of banknotes rubs
(Continued) inserting a excessively against the side note guides
cassette (x=1-6) (notes protrude to the side or are bent
backwards), then the stack of notes should
be better aligned.
2.) Re-insert the cassette. Can you hear
the pressure carriage moving forward?
- If you cannot hear any noise, check that
the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the cassette fir correctly.
Carry out the test using a different
cassette: If the motor still is not activated,
then the controller is faulty.
- If you can hear the motor, but error
message 4x still appears after a few
seconds (together with three acoustic
signals), remove the cassette and check
the lift of the dispensing shaft by hand.
Remove the cassette, open it and place it
in dispensing position by hand. Check the
smooth movement of the return bar.
3.) If you cannot find the cause of the
problem and if the same problem occurs in
this dispenser module with a different
cassette, then it is necessary to check the
quality of the pressure sensor using the
DYQ self-test program ‘check status of
cassette pressure’. If an error occurs, the
dispensing unit or controller should be
replaced.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-49


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Too many More than 5 notes were found to measure
x poor quality incorrectly during dispensing from one cassette
notes (too long, too short, too oblique).
Is the wrong denomination in the cassette? If
necessary determine a new reference value.
Cassette is The banknote data stored in cassette ‘x’ cannot be
x faulty read or re-written.
Check that the connector to central cash-out
controller II and the cassette connector fit
correctly. If the fault also occurs with a different
cassette in this dispenser module, then the
controller should be replaced.
Thickness Check thickness measuring station MDMS II for
measuring jammed cash/ scraps.
station
Check connectors to the MDMS II and to the
MDMS II is not
controller.
ready to
operate After this, select function ‘1’ (Reset) on the
function button. If status code ‘70’ reappears after
the dispenser is started, then the dispenser unit
with the measuring station or controller must be
replaced.

8-50 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Dispensing A) If a cassette can be inserted in dispenser
sensor is dirty module ‘x’ without error (single acoustic signal),
x
or pressure then the error message indicates a very dirty
sensor is faulty ‘dispenser sensor’ (LAMx) photosensor in
(x=1-6) dispenser module ‘x’ which must be cleaned.
Then execute a reset (set cash-out module to
dispensing position).
Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status of
photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to check the
level of dirt on all photosensors: Photosensors
that show status ‘3’ (Service error) must be
cleaned. The improvement in status can be
checked after reset.
Note: The cash-out module can continue to
operate the first time this error occurs until
operation is automatically discontinued due to
accumulated dirt
B) If it is not possible to insert a cassette in
dispenser module ‘x’ (and there is no acoustic
signal even after a few seconds), then the
dispensing unit or controller must be replaced
after inspection of the connectors to central cash-
out controller II and to the pressure sensors (RLx).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-51


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Cassette Clean photosensor ‘KLx’ in the relevant dispenser
x empty sensor module and the associated prism in the pressure
is dirty (x=1-6) carriage. Then execute a reset (set cash-out
module to dispensing position).
Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status of
photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to check the
level of dirt on all photosensors: Photosensors
that show status ‘3’ (Service error) must be
cleaned. The improvement in status can be
checked after reset.
Note: The cash-out module can continue to
operate the first time this error occurs until
operation is automatically discontinued due to
accumulated dirt.

8-52 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode

Error Meaning Explanation/Measures


code
Photosensor is Photosensor ‘9x’ is dirty and is in urgent need
dirty of cleaning: the accumulation of dust on the
surfaces of the relevant transmitter/ receiver
and the associated prism should be removed
with a brush or with compressed air. After
2X00 stacker: cleaning, set the cash-out module to home
Photosensor L1 position again and wait for start-up or select ‘1’
(Reset) on the function button.

2X00 stacker: Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status


Photosensor L18 of photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to
check the level of dirt on all photosensors:
Photosensors that show status ‘3’ (Service
2X00 stacker: error) must be cleaned. The improvement in
Photosensor L21 status can be checked after reset.

Note: The cash-out module can continue to


2X00 stacker: operate the first time error code ‘9x’ occurs,
until operation is automatically discontinued
Photosensor L27 due to accumulated dirt (status ‘9x’ is also
displayed in this case).

2X00 stacker:
Photosensor L28

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 8-53


Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

8-54 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Camera 01750010360

1 24 V power supply 2 Video output

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 9-1


Technical data Camera 01750010360

Technical data
Parameter Value
Manufacturer Videotronic
Type GS-456/I SNI
Dimensions (WxHxD) PCB: 46 x 52 x 34.5 mm
Power supply cable Length 900 mm, 2-pin AMP plug
Case Sheet steel
Voltage 24 V DC
Video signal Coaxial plug

Pin assignment
Power supply (AMP 2 pin F)
1

Pin Name
1 GND
2 + 24 V

9-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Customer Connector Panel
3338700112

Description
External signal equipment can be controlled by the system using the customer
connector panel.

Connectors A, B, C, D
Each of these 3-pin connectors is fitted with a relay switch-over contact. The
relays can be switched via the application. The max. load of a switch-over
contact is 24 V / 1 A.
Connector E
This 4-pin connector is reserved for monitoring an optional UPS by the
application software.
This connector is used to route messages from a UPS to the special logic.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-1


Description Customer Connector Panel 3338700112

Connector F
Not assigned.
Connectors G, H
These 4-pin connectors are used to route signals from customer installations
(customer return messages), e. g. photosensors, proximity switches etc., to the
special electronics.
Connector I
Connector for the connecting cable to the special electronics.
See the following circuit diagram for the correct assignments of the
connectors.

10-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Customer Connector Panel 3338700112 Technical data

Technical data

Circuit diagram

Free/unused

M = Central
Ö= Normally closed
S= Normally open

Example:
Contact jumpered
Feedback is generated

1 Relay 1 6 UPS end of capacity


2 Relay 2 7 Customer feedback 1
3 Relay 3 8 Customer feedback 2
4 Relay 4 9 Customer feedback 3
5 UPS switched on 10 Customer feedback 4

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-3


Technical data Customer Connector Panel 3338700112

Pin assignment
Connector I (D-SUB, 15-pin M)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment


1 24 V 9 GND
2 10 UPS switched on
3 Customer relay 1 11 UPS end of capacity
4 Customer relay 2 12 Customer input 1
5 Customer relay 3 13 Customer input 2
6 Customer relay 4 14 Customer input 3
7 15 Customer input 4
8 GND

10-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100
The lit operator panel replaces the panels used up to now. In its basic setting,
it is largely compatible with the older types 6562.00 (high end) and 6578.00 /
6578.01 (low end with/without key-operated switch); however, if necessary it
can be set to full compatibility with the respective types via the setup
procedure.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-5


Mechanical construction Operator Panel 01750018100

Mechanical construction
Cap

F1

MGL(S)-240128T F2

F3

F4

A D 1 2 3 Abbruch Kunde

B E 4 5 6 Korrektur Geld

C F 7 8 9 , Papier

* 0 .
Service
Bestä-
Betrieb
tigung

Housing Cap Logic board

10-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Labelling of keys and indicators

Labelling of keys and indicators


The labelling of the keys and indicator elements can be customised using the
supplied sets of labels.

F1
Replaceable

Replaceable
MGL(S)-240128T F2
lable

lable
F3

F4

A D 1 2 3 Abbruch Kunde

B E 4 5 6 Korrektur Geld

C F 7 8 9 , Papier

* 0 .
Service
Bestä-
Betrieb
tigung
Replaceable

Operator panel
logic unit
lable

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-7


Labelling of keys and indicators Operator Panel 01750018100

Perform the following steps to change the labels:

• To avoid damage to the logic by static, discharge the static by touching a


grounded surface.
• Release the connector lock and disconnect the connector from the operator
panel.
• Remove a cap by loosening the respective screws on the rear of the
housing.
• Remove the M4 countersunk screw on the rear of the device.
• Remove the electronics module from the guides of the housing.
• Replace the labelling strip.
• Reassemble in reverse order of removal.

If only the label strip of the lower key block must be changed, it is
i sufficient to remove the lower cap.

10-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Switching on

Switching on
As soon as the supply voltage is applied, the operator panel switches on
automatically and performs a power-on routine with an internal test.
A beep sounds at the beginning and at the end of this test. The device is ready
to operate after completion of the test.

The following screen is displayed briefly after completion of the test.


Message if
HARDWARE TEST an error
occurred
Check sum ok
Display ok error
Extern RAM ok error
Intern RAM ok error
Displ. RAM ok error
EEPROM ok error
error
Quit program .. CANCEL

If the used connecting cable is not suitable for operation with lighting
i (usually in systems that were delivered until the end of 1998), the
following display appears:
Cable without 12/24V

If an error occurred during the internal test, the red Service LED is lit, provided
that it is not disabled by the application.

Replace the device if the error keeps occurring after the unit has been
i switched on repeatedly.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-9


Operation Operator Panel 01750018100

Operation
In the operating mode, the operation of the operator panel including the LED
indicators is taken over by the application.

Simulating the key-operated switch function


In the high end and low end mode, the function of the key-operated switch is
shown on the upper two function keys (F5 and F6) to the left of the display.
This can be made clear by using the enclosed labelling strip.
F5 (1st key from top) = key-operated switch ON
F6 = key-operated switch OFF

10-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Display lighting

Display lighting
With the operator panel 01750018100 it is possible to activate an LCD
background lighting. This requires a cable which supplies the operator panel
with 12 V or 24 V.
The lighting is activated after switching on, and 10 minutes after activation or
the last time a key was pressed it switches to save mode. In order to reach the
max. MTBF of the display, it is recommended that the lighting not be activated
constantly.
The lighting can be switched on again by activating the keyboard, by V.24
lighting jobs and by using keys.
The effect of key acknowledgements on the lighting or the output of key codes
in the individual OP modes is shown in the following table.

Low End High End LE/H Mode


Mode Mode
Keyboard switched off, light off light on light on
Keyboard switched on, light off light on + key light on light on + key
code code
Keyboard switched off, light on light on for Light on for
another 10 another 10
min. min.
Keyboard switched on, light on Light on for Light on for Light on for
another 10 another 10 another 10
min. + key min. + key min. + key
code code code

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-11


Setup Operator Panel 01750018100

Setup
The setup mode is invoked if any key is pushed during the internal test in the
power-up phase (time frame: between the two beeps).

Setup program start mask

SETUP-PROGRAMM:
WARNING: This program is for
authorized personnel only!

Exit program................ 0

OperatorpaneTyp............. 1
Language.................... 2
Line Setup ................. 3
Display Contrast Settings .. 4
Special Functions .......... 5

Press the corresponding numeric keys to select the setting menus.

10-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Setup

Setting the operator panel type

OPERATORPANEL-TYP:

Low End OP ........... 0


High End OP .......... 1
HighEnd & LowEnd...... 2

Active Mode: 2

Quit Program ......... CANCEL


Values OK ............ ACCEPT
HighEnd & LowEnd-OP(2) = Default value

During system installation and running application, the default setting


i can lead to a faulty display output. In this case it is recommended to
set the compatible mode (0 or 1) supported by the application.

Setting the national language


When entering 0, 1, 2 or 3, the screen changes immediately to the
respective language version which, however, is only stored when the
CONFIRM key is pressed.

LANGUAGE:

German ............... 0
English .............. 1
French ............... 2
Spanish .............. 3

Quit Program ......... CANCEL


Values OK ............ ACCEPT

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-13


Setup Operator Panel 01750018100

Setting the interface parameters

INTERFACE PARAMETERS

Baudrate: 9600 9600 baud


= Default
value
Quit Program ......... CANCEL
Correction necessary.. CORR.
Values OK ............ ACCEPT

When ABORT or CONFIRM is pressed, the following menu is displayed.


Save the baud rate setting by pressing CONFIRM.

INTERFACE PARAMETERS

Baudrate: 38400 Even


Parity: even
= Default
Quit menu item ....... ABORT value
Change setting ....... CORR.
Setting OK ........... CONFIRM

CONFIRM saves the setting and ABORT exits the menu item without
saving baudrate and parity.

10-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Setup

Setting the display contrast

DISPLAY CONTRAST SETTING:

Display brighter.... 0
Display darker ..... 1

Quit Program ....... CANCEL


Values OK .......... ACCEPT

Calling the special functions

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Keyboard Test ........ 0


Hardware Test ........ 1
Display Test ......... 2
Firmware Version...... 3

Quit Program ......... CANCEL

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-15


Setup Operator Panel 01750018100

Special functions: keyboard test

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Keyboard Test ........ 0


Hardware Test ........ 1
Display Test.......... 2
Firmware Version...... 3

Quit Program ......... CANCEL

Key:

Output of function keys


next to the display:
left F5 to F8
right F1 to F4

Output of function keys next to the


numeric pad:
CORR / , / ACCEPT

10-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Setup

Electronic test
A beep sounds when starting the test and all LEDs are selected during the
test.

HARDWARE TEST

Checksum ok
Display ok
Extern RAM ok
Intern RAM ok
Displ. RAM ok
EEPROM ok
Cable with 12/24V

Quit Program ....... CANCEL

In the event of an error, the message changes from ok to error.


If the connecting cable used is not suitable for operation with lighting, the
following display appears:
Cable without 12/24 V

Display test
In the character mode 2 (30 x 10 character) first characters are displayed from
20 (hex) to FF (hex) on the display. Next a displaced chessboard pattern
appears which makes it possible to detect the defective lines or columns. After
a few seconds the display is completely dark, so the adjustment for the display
window can be checked. Then the setup main menu appears.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-17


Setup Operator Panel 01750018100

Firmware version

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Keyboard Test ........ 0
Hardware Test ........ 1
Display Test ......... 2
Firmware Version...... 3

Quit Program ......... CANCEL

Firmware: Release.Version - Date

Example:

Firmware: 02.01 - 18.09.96

corresponds to release 02, version 01 of 18 Sept 96.


Starting with FW release 03.00, the improvement in performance and the
lighting control are included and the date format has changed to comply with
ISO 8601.
Example: 1998-09-28

10-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Operator Panel 01750018100 Maintenance

Maintenance
Due to the lack of compatibility with the predecessor types regarding
i connectors and mechanical securing, old and new units cannot be
interchanged.

Technical data
Dimensions: 239 mm x 170 mm x 28.5 mm (L x W x H)

Power source: 5V
12 V or 24 V for lighting
Interface: RS 232

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-19


Pin assignment Operator Panel 01750018100

Pin assignment

1
8 pin Western plug, F

Pin Signal name Function


1 TxD Transmit data
2 RxD Receive data
3 RTS Request to send (output)
4 CTS Clear to send (input))
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
7 5V Supply voltage electronic
8 12 V / 24 V Supply voltage lighting

10-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700
Type Material number Description
120 V 01750007996 UPS for 120 V power supply systems
240 V 0324000000 UPS for 240 V power supply systems

Controls

Front side

Voltage reduction On/Test


Overload

Battery charging/
Devices mains voltage

Online Battery mode


Voltage amplification Off Replace battery

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-21


Controls Smart UPS 700

Rear side

Configuration switch
Computer interface port Configuration LED

TVSS earthing Accessories slot

Power output

Mains connection Automatic output


switch

10-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Switching on

Switching on
Press ON /Test switch (upper
switch).

The UPS issues an acoustic signal


and carries out a self-test, while the
connected devices are immediately
supplied with power.

(See the section "Self-test").

Switching off
Press the OFF switch (bottom switch)
to switch the output power of the
UPS off.

Under certain circumstances it may


be useful to use the ON and OFF
switches of the UPS as the mains
switches for the devices connected.

The UPS is switched on (the internal processor is running) when


i the power cable is connected and mains power is available. Even
after the UPS has been switched off, it maintains the battery charge
and responds to commands from the computer interface port and
the accessories board.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-23


Self-test Smart UPS 700

Self-test
The self-test can be used to test the
UPS operation and the battery
charge level.
If the UPS is connected to a normal
safety socket, a self-test is carried out
when the ON / OFF switch is
pressed.

The UPS issues a beep, and the


Online-LED flashes.

As a default, the UPS carries out a self-test whenever it is switched


i on, and every 14 days.
During the self-test the UPS supplies the connected devices with
battery power for a short time (the battery LED shines). If the UPS
passes the self-test, it switches back to line power. The battery
LED goes off, and the Online-LED shines constantly.
If the UPS does not pass the self-test, it switches to line power
immediately, and the LED indicating that the battery needs
replacing, lights up. The connected devices are not affected by a
replacement. Charge the battery over night and repeat the self-test.
If the LED "Replace battery" still lights up after the battery has been
charged, the battery must be replaced. (See the enclosed,
separate description of the UPS for information on how to replace
the battery).

10-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Indicators and warnings

Indicators and warnings


LED Indicator Meaning Audible alarm
Online Permanent The connected devices are
light provided with mains power.
Flashing Executing the self-test. Beep
Voltage Permanent The UPS compensates for
increase light low voltage (no power-fail
mode).
Voltage Permanent The UPS compensates for
reduction light low voltage (no power-fail
mode).
Overload Permanent Load of > 700 VA / 450 W Continuous tone
light
Battery Permanent The connected devices are 4 beeps every
operation light provided with mains power 30 sec.
via the battery.
Replace Permanent End of battery life. Short beeps of
battery light 1 min.
repeat interval
every 5 hours.
Left row of Permanent Device load >
LEDs light

80 % 67 % 50 % 33 % 17 %

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-25


Indicators and warnings Smart UPS 700

LED Indicator Meaning Audible alarm


Right row of Permanent Battery capacity >
LEDs light

100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 %

Bottom LEDs are flashing:


2 minutes operating time
left.
Push and hold ON/ test pushbutton switch.
Permanent Mains voltage >
light

264V 247V 230V 213V 196V

10-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Indicators and warnings

LED Indicator Meaning Audible alarm


Configuration permanent Voltage threshold
(rear side) light normal (default)
bright
permanent Voltage threshold
light reduced setting
faint
off Voltage threshold
low setting
If ON/test key is pressed
bright Warning time setting 2
minutes
faint Warning time setting 5
minutes
off Warning time setting 7
minutes
all LEDs continuously Switching off the UPS via
alternating computer interface.
all LEDs Permanent Internal UPS problem. Continuous tone
light Turn off immediately and
repair!

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-27


Indicators and warnings Smart UPS 700

Error messages

Problem Possible cause Elimination


UPS cannot be A test key has not Press ON/test switch key to switch
switched on. been pressed. the UPS and the system on.
UPS automatic cutout Disconnect connected components
tripped. from the UPS and examine for
mains faults. Eliminate errors,
connect components and push in
automatic cutout.
Very low or no line Check mains power supply with
voltage. voltmeter.
UPS cannot be Problem with the Interrupt the connection to the
switched ON or computer interface. computer interface. If the UPS
OFF. works normally, check the
interface cable and the connected
system control unit.
UPS works with Very high, low or Check the input voltage on the line
battery distorted line voltage. voltage indicator of the UPS. Fuel-
although driven generators of moderate
normal line quality can lead to voltage
voltage is distortion. Reduce voltage
available. threshold of the UPS, if necessary.
UPS beeps Normal UPS None.
occasionally. operation.
Indicators on The UPS was turned None.
the front flash off by the system The UPS restarts as soon as
one after the control unit (PC). mains power is available again.
other.

10-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Indicators and warnings

Problem Possible cause Elimination


UPS does not The battery is weak Charge battery. The batteries of
offer the due to a recent line the UPS must be charged after a
expected power failure or has longer power failure. Batteries get
backup time. only a short lifetime weak faster if they are operated
left. often or at increased
temperatures. If the battery has
reached almost the end of its life,
it could be replaced even if the
indicator for battery replacement
did not yet come on.
UPS is overloaded. Check the load on the UPS device
load indicator. Check connected
components.
All indicators Internal UPS problem. Do not use the UPS, turn off
are lit and a immediately and repair.
continuous tone
sounds.
The low battery The UPS is turned off None.
LED is lit and and the battery is The UPS returns automatically to
the online LED exhausted due to an normal operation as soon as
is off. extended power power is restored and the battery
failure. is charged sufficiently.
The LED for Weak battery. Charge the batteries for at least
replacing the four hours. Replace the batteries if
battery is lit. the problem still exists after
charging.
Replacement batteries Check the battery connections.
not connected
properly.
For detailed operating and maintenance instructions refer to the
i enclosed separate UPS device description.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-29


Data interface Smart UPS 700

Data interface
To evaluate the status messages of the UPS and to control the switching on /
off, a data interface is available.

Pin assignment

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9

Pin Assignment Meaning


1 UPS switch-off/TX input (V.24)
2 Line failure/RX output (V.24)
3 Switching contact, N/O contact between pin Battery operation
3/4
4 Base contact for the switch contacts 3, 5, 6
5 Switching contact, N/O contact between pin Weak battery
4/5
6 Switching contact, N/C contact between pin
4/6
7 UPS ON/OFF (input signal)
8 Unregulated output, 24 V DC
9 GND

10-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Technical data

Technical data
Rated power 700 VA / 450 W
Input
Voltage ≈ 176 to 282 V
Rated frequency: 50 or 60 Hz ± 5 %
Primary fuse Resettable automatic cutout
Output (battery operation)
Output voltage ≈ 196 to 253 V
Output frequency 50 Hz, ± 1%
Waveform Sinusoidal wave with low distortion
Mains buffering
Transfer time mains ⇔ battery max. 4 ms
Batteries
Battery type Lead, sealed and maintenance-free
Charging period Approx. 2 to 5 h
Lifetime: 3 to 6 years (depending on
temperature and number of discharge
cycles)
Ambient conditions
Electrical safety EN 50091
Electromagnet. compatibility IEC 801
Ambient temperature (operation) 0 to 40 °C at max. 95 % r.F
Dimensions:
Height / width / depth 158 x 137 x 358 mm
Weight 13.1 kg

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-31


Safety precautions Smart UPS 700

Safety precautions
− Unplug the mains connector of the UPS before installing the UPS computer
interface cable. Reconnect the power cord only after all signal connections
have been restored.
− The UPS is equipped with an internal energy source (battery).
The current output is active even if the device is not connected to the
mains.
− Press the OFF key for at least one second to interrupt the power supply of
the UPS so that the UPS is turned off. Then disconnect the power plug of
the UPS. Finally, disconnect the power supply by the battery.

Maintenance and installation

Special settings
The settings are made by pressing the configuration key on the back side of
the UPS with a pointed object (e.g. a ball-point pen). The settings change by
one value within the adjustment range each time the key is pressed.

Meaning of the LED symbols

Bright Faint Dark

10-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Smart UPS 700 Maintenance and installation

Voltage threshold

normal

reduced

low

The UPS senses irregularities in the line voltage like voltage peaks, black-outs,
under- and overvoltages as well as distortions which are caused by fuel-driven
generators of moderate quality. The UPS reacts to irregularities by utilising the
battery to protect the devices. The UPS changes to battery operation more
frequently if the current is of bad quality. If the devices function normally under
these conditions, battery performance and capacity can be improved by
lowering the UPS sensitivity.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-33


Repairs and battery replacement Smart UPS 700

Warning interval with low battery charge

Press the configuration key and hold down the ON/Test key on the
i device front at the same time to change this setting.
The UPS is pre-set so that you are warned two minutes before the battery runs
out. If this warning time is not sufficient in the application, it can be set to a
higher value.

Repairs and battery replacement


Repairs and battery replacement must be carried out by the repair center.

10-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


User Guidance

Control
The user guidance arrows can only be controlled via the special electronics
module III. By means of the application different states can be preset:
Permanent light
Flashing light at 0.5 Hz
Flashing light at 1 Hz
Flashing light at 2 Hz
Flashing light at 4 Hz

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-35


4- / 6-digit user guidance User Guidance

4- / 6-digit user guidance


4-digit user guidance:
Order number: 01750022270

6-digit user guidance:


Order number: 01750022271

10-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


User Guidance 4- / 6-digit user guidance

Pin assignment

1 2 3

Pin Name
1 Power source
2 + 24 V
3 GND

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-37


4- / 6-digit user guidance User Guidance

10-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Powersave Print

Powersave Print without LED control


Reference number: 0074400815
In order to save energy in standby mode, devices can be equipped with a
’Powersave Print’ (devices running WinNT only). The electronics boards uses
the first of the 4 control outputs of special electronics III (24 V controller) to
activate and deactivate 24 V consumers in the device (e.g. cash-out modules)
by means of an MOS-FET. In addition, the Powersave Print also contains an
integrated voltage monitor and power-on current limiter.

Powersave Print with LED control


Reference number: 0066900015
This board is the same as the ’Powersave Print without LED Control’.
It has two additional functions:
− This PCB is equipped with an I²C bus expander, enabling a further 8
power sources for LEDs and user guidance systems, for example in
auxiliary cabinets for teller machines, to be activated (irrespective of the
operating system).
− There are 2 electronic switches for controlling fans in the auxiliary cabinet;
these are controlled by means of a signal from special electronics III
(WinNT only).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-39


Views Powersave Print

Views

Powersave Print without LED control

1 X4: Fan controller & connector SE III / power dist. 6-pin Berg connector
2 X5: Fan controller & connector SE III / power dist. 6-pin Berg connector
3 X1: Connector for internal in/output II from SE III 26-pin Dubox
4 X7: Not connected or not installed (depending on revision level)
5 X6: Not connected or not installed (depending on revision level)
6 X2: 24 V input from power supply unit 2-pin AMP socket
7 X3: Switched 24 V output for consumers 2-pin AMP socket

10-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Powersave Print Views

Powersave Print with LED control

1 X4: Fan controller & connector SE III / power dist. 6-pin Berg connector
2 X5: Fan controller & connector SE III / power dist. -pin Berg connector
3 X1: Connector for internal in/output II from SE III 26-pin Dubox
4 X7: Output for power sources 13-16 and fans 20-pin Dubox
5 X6: Output for power sources 9-12 and fans 18-pin Dubox
6 X2: 24 V input from power supply unit 2-pin AMP socket
7 X3: Switched 24 V output for consumers 2-pin AMP socket

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-41


10-42
Wiring plans

Wiring plans

Switched 24 V output 24 V input from Internal inputs/ outputs II


Fan control and connection to SE III / Power distr. for consumer (e.g. AZM) power supply unit of SE III
Connector X5, 6-pin Berg Connector X4, 6-pin Berg Connector X3, 2-pin Connector X2, 2-pin Connector X1, 26-pin Dubox
AMP connector AMP fem. connector

Gate control
Voltage monitoring,
Powersave Print without LED control

Inrush current limitation,

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual


01750030886 A
Powersave Print
Switched 24 V output 24 V input from Internal inputs/outputs II
Fan control and connection to SE III / Power distr. for consumer (e.g. AZM) power supply unit of SE III
Connector X5, 6-pin Berg Connector X4, 6-pin Berg Connector X3, 2-pin Connector X2, 2-pin ConnectorX1, 26-pin Dubox
AMP connector AMP fem. connector

01750030886 A
Powersave Print

Gate control

Switch
Switch
Voltage monitoring
Inrush current limitation
24 V

2 Slave
Signal

I C bus expander
(Inter-Integrated-Circuit-Serial-Bus) address:
0100000
conditioning
Powersave Print with LED control

ProCash 2000 - Service Manual


Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power

Power

source
source
source
source
source
source
source

source

Fan

Fan
11

12
10
9

15
14
13

16
Connector X7, 20-pin Dubox Connector X6, 18-pin Dubox
Output power sources 13-16 and fan Output power sources 9-12 and fan
Wiring plans

10-43
Pin assignment Powersave Print

Pin assignment

X1: Signals from connector, internal in/outputs II from SE


III
These connectors are used to control the user guidance systems in the
extension units.
Pin Assignment
1 24 V controller 1
2 Not connected
3 Not connected
4 Not connected
5 I²C bus data, input only
6 I²C bus clock, input only
7 Not connected
8 GND
9 Not connected
10 GND
11 Not connected
12 GND
13 Not connected
14 GND
15 Not connected
16 GND
17 Not connected
18 GND
19 +5 V
20 +5 V
21 +24 V
22 +24 V
23 Not connected
24 Not connected
25 GND
26 GND

10-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Powersave Print Pin assignment

X2: 24 V input from power supply unit

Pin Assignment
1 GND
2 + 24 V

X3: Switched 24 V output for consumers

Pin Assignment
1 GND
2 Switched + 24 V

X4: Connector for fan control and SE III / power


distributor connection
Connectors X4 and X5 have the same assignment. They are required in order
to be able to use the signal from special electronics III (contact 4) in the
Powersave Print for fan control and to supply power for the fans in the auxiliary
cabinet. All other contacts are simply used to establish the relevant
connections between the special electronics and power distributor.

Pin Assignment
1 + 24 V (connected with contact 1 of X5)
2 24 V delayed switching (connected with contact 2 of X5)
3 GND (connected with contact 3 of X5)
4 Signal for fan control (connected with contact 4 of X5)
5 Logo illumination (connected with contact 5 of X5)
6 Monitor (connected with contact 6 of X5)

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-45


Pin assignment Powersave Print

X5: Connector for fan control and SE III / power


distributor connection
Connectors X4 and X5 have the same assignment. They are required in order
to be able to use the signal from special electronics III (contact 4) in the
Powersave Print for fan control and to supply power for the fans in the auxiliary
cabinet. All other contacts are simply used to establish the relevant
connections between the special electronics and power distributor.

Pin Assignment
1 + 24 V (connected with contact 1 of X4)
2 24 V delayed switching (connected with contact 2 of X4)
3 GND (connected with contact 3 of X4)
4 Signal for fan control (connected with contact 4 of X4)
5 Logo illumination (connected with contact 5 of X4)
6 Monitor (connected with contact 6 of X4)

10-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Powersave Print Pin assignment

X6: Output for power sources 9-12 and fans


(’Powersave with LED Control’ variant only)

Pin Assignment
1 Power source 9
2 Power source 10
3 + 24 V
4 + 24 V
5 GND
6 GND
7 Power source 11
8 Power source 12
9 + 24 V
10 + 24 V
11 GND
12 GND
13 Switched fan voltage (+24 V)
14 GND for fans
15 +5V
16 + 24 V
17 GND
18 GND

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 10-47


Pin assignment Powersave Print

X7: Output for power sources 13-16 and fans


(’Powersave with LED Control’ variant only)

Pin Assignment
1 Power source 13
2 Power source 14
3 + 24 V
4 + 24 V
5 GND
6 GND
7 Power source 15
8 Power source 16
9 + 24 V
10 + 24 V
11 GND
12 GND
13 Switched fan voltage (+24 V)
14 GND for fans
15 +5V
16 + 24 V
17 GND
18 GND
19 Not connected
20 Not connected

10-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components
RL
This chapter describes the removal and installation of the ProCash 2000
Rearload components.

Device views

Front view

1 Logo 5 Table
2 LCD colour monitor 6 Logo
3 Cash output 7 Receipt output
4 Keyboard 8 IDCU, DIP or SWIPE

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-1


Device views Removal/Installation of Components RL

Rear view

1 Lock of operator panel 4 Handle of safe door


2 Lock of device door 5 Lock of safe door
3 Number combination lock

11-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Device views

Device door opened

1 PC 5 Knob for unlocking customer


2 Power supply unit panel
3 Receipt printer 6 Power distributor
4 Journal printer 7 Special electronics
8 Operator panel

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-3


Device views Removal/Installation of Components RL

Safe door opened

1 MM converter
2 Cash-out module
3 Customer connector panel

11-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Opening the ProCash 2000

Opening the ProCash 2000

Opening / closing the device door

Turn the key (1) 90° to the right.


Lift the device door up.
Close the device door by following
the same steps in reverse order.

Opening / closing the customer panel

• Open the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening / closing the
device door").

Push the lever (1) down to open the


customer panel.
Pull out the customer panel as far as
it will go.
To close the customer panel touch it
in the middle and push it into the
device until it is engaged.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-5


Opening the ProCash 2000 Removal/Installation of Components RL

Pulling out the printer carriage

• Open the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening / closing the
device door").

Pull the locking knob (1) and, using


the green handle (2), pull out the
printer tray as far as it will go.

Pulling out the pull-out unit

• Open the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening / closing the
device door").
• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").

Remove the screw (1) and pull out


the pull-out unit as far as it will go.

11-6 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Opening the ProCash 2000

Pulling out the cash-out module

• Open the safe door (refer to the Operating Manual).

Grasping the green handle (1), pull


out the cash-out module as far as it
will go.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-7


AZM output transport Removal/Installation of Components RL

AZM output transport

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plug (1), loosen the


screws (2) and pull the AZM output
transport somewhat toward you.
Use the green handle to pull the AZM
output transport up out of the device.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Operator panel

• Open the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening the ProCash
2000 RL" ).

Disconnect the plug (1).

11-8 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Operator panel

Loosen the screws (1) and (2), push


the holder a little to the right and
remove it including the operator
panel.

Turn the holder upside down, loosen


the screw (1) and remove the
operator panel from its holder.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-9


Special electronics Removal/Installation of Components RL

Special electronics

• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").


• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect all plugs from the special


electronics module.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2), push
the special electronics module a little
to the right and lift it up.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Powersave Print

• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").


• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Remove the power supply unit (1)


(see section "Power supply unit").
Disconnect all plugs from the
powersave print (2).
Pull the board upwards out of the
mounting clips.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-10 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Power distributor

Power distributor

• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").


• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect all plugs from the power


distributor.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2).
Lift the power distributor up some
and remove it to the front.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Power supply unit

• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").


• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect all plugs from the power


supply unit and loosen the two
screws (1).
Pull the power supply unit a little
toward you, lift it up and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-11


Capacitor (only ID18) Removal/Installation of Components RL

Capacitor (only ID18)

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

• Remove the paper roll of the receipt printer (see the Operating Manual
which is enclosed with the device).

Loosen the screw (1).


Pull the capacitor from the clip to the
left (see arrow).

Disconnect the plug (1).


Remove the cable binder and the
rubber cover (2) to remove the
connection cable.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

When installing the capacitor, be sure to take note of the polarity of


the connecting cables.

11-12 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Journal printer ND98

Journal printer ND98

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Loosen the two screws (1).


Pull the journal printer a little toward
you and lift it up some.

Remove the two plugs (1) and (2)


and lift the journal printer up and out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-13


Receipt printer ND9C Removal/Installation of Components RL

Receipt printer ND9C

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2).

Disconnect the screw (1) on the left


side.

11-14 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL ID18

Loosen the screw (1) on the right


side and lift the receipt printer up and
out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

ID18

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2).


Pull the locking pin (3) upwards and
push the ID18 with holder in the
direction of the arrow.
If necessary, open the customer
panel and remove the ID18 with
holder to the fronts.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-15


DIP push-in card reader reader Removal/Installation of Components RL

Loosen the screws (1) and (2)


underneath the ID18.
Push the ID18 a little in the direction
of the arrow and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

DIP push-in card reader reader

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plug (1) from the DIP


Push-in card reader.
Remove the screws (2) and (5).
Remove the push-in card reader with
holder and cover.
Hold on to the cover while
you remove the push-in
card reader.

11-16 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL DIP push-in card reader reader

Remove the cover (1).

Remove the screws (1) to (4) and


remove the holder (5).
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-17


SWIPE card reader Removal/Installation of Components RL

SWIPE card reader

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Remove the screws (1) to (3) and


disconnect the plug (4).If necessary,
loosen the cable binder.

Push the SWIPE card reader in the


direction of the arrow out of the
customer panel.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Customer connector panel

• Pull out the cash out module (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect all plugs from the


customer connector panel and loosen
the screws (1) and (2). Push the
customer connector panel a little to
the left and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-18 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL MM converter

MM converter

• If necessary, pull out the AZM (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect all plugs, loosen the


screws (1) and (2) and pull out the
MM converter.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

PC

• Open the door of the operating unit (see section "Opening the ProCash
2000 RL" ).

Pull the PC (1) out of the device far


enough to be able to access the back
side.
Disconnect all plugs from the back
panel of the PC.
Remove the PC from the device.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-19


User guidance LEDs Removal/Installation of Components RL

User guidance LEDs


Three LEDs are provided for ProCash 2000 user guidance. They are all
removed in the same way.

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plug (1) and remove


the screws (2).
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

10,4’’ LCD monitor without Touchscreen

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Remove the screw (1) and


disconnect the plugs (2) and (3).
Loosen the knurled screws (4) on the
right side.

11-20 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD

Loosen the knurled screw (1) on the


left side and lift the LCD monitor up
and out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL")
and remove the LCD monitor (see section "10,4’’ LCD monitor").

Disconnect the plugs (1).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-21


Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD Removal/Installation of Components RL

Remove the screw (1) on the right


side of the customer panel.

Remove the screw (1) on the left side


of the customer panel.

Disconnect the plug (1).

11-22 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD

Remove the four screws (1).

Remove the four screws (1) and


remove the pane / softkey unit.

Disconnect the plug connections (1)


and/or (2).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-23


Pane / softkey unit for 10,4’’ LCD Removal/Installation of Components RL

Turn the pane/softkey unit around.


Remove the screws (1) to (6).

Turn the pane/softkey unit around


and remove the cover (1).

Turn the pane/softkey unit around


and remove the screws (1) and (2) on
the left and/or the right side.
Pull off the corresponding softkeys.

11-24 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL 15’’ LCD monitor

Reinstall it by following the same


steps in reverse order.
Make sure that the recess for the
softkey cables are at the right
position when you install the cover
(see arrow).

15’’ LCD monitor

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Remove the screws (1) and (2).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-25


Removal/Installation of Components RL

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2) and


loosen the screws (3).

Pull the locking pins (1) and (2)


simultaneously outwards.
Remove the monitor upwards out of
the holder.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-26 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Touch pane for 15’’ LCD monitor

Touch pane for 15’’ LCD monitor

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").
• Remove the 15’’ LCD monitor (see section "15’’ LCD monitor").

Remove all cable binder. Disconnect


the two plug connections (1) and (2).
Remove the 4 lower screws (3) to (6).

Remove the 4 upper screws (1) to


(4).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-27


Touch pane for 15’’ LCD monitor Removal/Installation of Components RL

Remove a screw on the left and the


right side of the operator panel.
The picture shows only the left screw
(1).
Remove the touchscreen with holder.

Remove the screws (1) to (4).


Remove the Frame of touch pane (5)
from the touch pane holder (6).
Remove the touch pane.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-28 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components RL Keyboard

Keyboard

PIN keyboard

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plug (1).


Remove the four screws (2) and
remove the keyboard downwards.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

EPP keyboard

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plug (1), remove the


four screws (2) and remove the
keyboard.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-29


Loudspeaker Removal/Installation of Components RL

Loudspeaker
The ProCash 2000 is equipped with three loudspeakers which are all removed
in the same way.

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
RL").

Disconnect the plugs (1), remove the


screws (2) and remove the
loudspeaker.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-30 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components
FL
This chapter describes the removal and installation of the ProCash 2000
Frontload components.

Device views

Front view

1 Logo 6 Lock of device door


2 LCD colour monitor 7 Logo
3 Cash output 8 Receipt output
4 Keyboard 9 IDCU, DIP or SWIPE
5 Table

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-31


Device views Removal/Installation of Components FL

Customer panel opened

1 PC 5 Receipt printer
2 Power distributor 6 ID18
3 Special electronics 7 Knob for unlocking customer
4 Cash-out module (AZM) panel

11-32 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Device views

Safe door opened

1 Handle of AZM 3 EDM module


2 MM converter 4 Cash-out module

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-33


Opening the ProCash 2000 FL Removal/Installation of Components FL

Opening the ProCash 2000 FL

Opening / closing the device door

Turn the key (1) 90° to the right.


Pull the door handle toward you and
turn it counterclockwise.
Close the device door by following
the same steps in reverse order.

Opening /closing the customer panel

• Open the device door (see section "Opening / closing the device door").

Push the lever up (see arrow).


Holding on to both sides, pull out the
customer panel as far as it will go.
Close the device door by following
the same steps in reverse order.

11-34 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Opening the ProCash 2000 FL

Pulling out the printer carriage

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening /closing the customer
panel").

Pull the locking knob to the right (1)


and, using the green handle (2), pull
out the printer tray as far as it will go.

Pulling out the pull-out unit

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening /closing the customer
panel").

Remove the screw (1) and pull out


the equipment carriage as far as it
will go.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-35


Opening the ProCash 2000 FL Removal/Installation of Components FL

Pulling out the AZM cash-out module

• Open the safe door (refer to the Operating Manual).

Grasping the green handle (1), pull


out the cash-out module as far as it
will go.

11-36 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL AZM output transport

AZM output transport

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plug (1) and loosen


the screws (2).
Push the output transport back a
little.
Use the green handle (3) to pull the
AZM output transport up out of the
device.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Operator panel

• Open the device door (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Push the Operator Panel holder up


(see arrow).
Make sure that the latch (1) clicks in
place.
Disconnect the plug (2).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-37


Operator panel Removal/Installation of Components FL

Loosen the screw (1) and lift the


Operator Panel up and out of its
holder.

To return the holder to its original


position, lift it up some and push
against the latch from underneath
(see arrow).

11-38 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Special electronics

Special electronics

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").
• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect all plugs from the special


electronics module.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2), push
the special electronics module a little
to the right and lift it up.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Powersave Print

• Remove the operator panel (see section "Operator panel").


• Pull out the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Remove the power supply unit (1)


(see section "Power supply unit").
Disconnect all plugs from the
powersave print (2).
Pull the board upwards out of the
mounting clips.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-39


Power distributor Removal/Installation of Components FL

Power distributor

• Pull out the customer panel and the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the
ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect all plugs from the power


distributor.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2).
Lift the power distributor up some
and remove it to the front.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Power supply unit

• Pull out the customer panel and the pull-out unit (see section "Opening the
ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect all plugs from the power


supply unit and loosen the two
screws (1).
Pull the power supply unit a little
toward you, lift it up and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-40 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Capacitor (only ID18)

Capacitor (only ID18)

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

• Remove the paper roll of the receipt printer (see the Operating Manual
which is enclosed with the device).

Loosen the screw (1).


Pull the capacitor from the clip to the
left (see arrow).

Disconnect the plug (1).


Remove the cable binder and the
rubber cover (2) to remove the
connection cable.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

When installing the capacitor, be sure to take note of the polarity of


the connecting cables.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-41


Journal printer ND98 Removal/Installation of Components FL

Journal printer ND98

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect the two plugs (1) and (2).

Disconnect the two plugs (1) and (2).


Pull the journal printer a little toward
the inside of the device, lift it up and
out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-42 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Receipt printer ND9C

Receipt printer ND9C

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2).


Loosen the screws (1) and (2).
Lift the receipt printer up and out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

ID18

• Pull out the printer carriage (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 RL").

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2).


Pull the locking pin (3) upwards and
push the ID18 to the front.
Remove the ID18 to the front.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-43


DIP push-in card reader Removal/Installation of Components FL

Loosen the screws (1) and (2)


underneath the ID18.
Push the ID18 a little in the direction
of the arrow and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

DIP push-in card reader

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plug (1) from the DIP


Push-in card reader.
Remove the screws (2) and (5).
Remove the push-in card reader with
holder and cover.
Hold on to the cover while
you remove the push-in
card reader.

11-44 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL

Remove the cover (1).

Remove the screws (1) to (4) and


remove the holder (5).
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-45


SWIPE card reader Removal/Installation of Components FL

SWIPE card reader

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Remove the screws (1) to (3) and


disconnect the plug (4).If necessary,
loosen the cable binder.

Push the SWIPE card reader in the


direction of the arrow out of the
customer panel.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Customer connector panel

• Pull out the AZM (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect all plugs from the


customer connector panel and loosen
the screws (1) and (2). Push the
customer connector panel a little to
the left and remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-46 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL MM converter

MM converter

• If necessary, pull out the AZM (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000
FL").

Disconnect all plugs, loosen the


screws (1) and (2) and pull out the
MM converter.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

EDM module
(Encryption / Decryption Module)
• Pull out the AZM (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Loosen the screw (1).


Grasping the handle (2), pull out the
EDM module toward you.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-47


PC Removal/Installation of Components FL

PC

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Pull the PC (1) out of the device far


enough to be able to access the back
side.
Disconnect all plugs from the back
panel of the PC.
Remove the PC from the device.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

User guidance LEDs


Three LEDs are provided for ProCash 2000 user guidance. They are all
removed in the same way.

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plug (1).


Remove the screws (2).
Remove the user guidance LED.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-48 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL10,4" LCD monitor without Touchscreen

10,4" LCD monitor without Touchscreen

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Remove the screw (1) and


disconnect the plugs (2) and (3).
Loosen the knurled screws (4) on the
right side.

Loosen the knurled screw (1) on the


left side and lift the LCD monitor up
and out.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-49


Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD Removal/Installation of Components FL

Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL")
and remove the LCD monitor (see section "10,4’’ LCD monitor without
Touchscreen").

Disconnect the two plug connections


(1).

Remove the screw (1) on the right


side of the customer panel.

11-50 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD

Remove the screw (1) on the left side


of the customer panel.

Disconnect the plug (1).

Remove the four screws (1).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-51


Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD Removal/Installation of Components FL

Remove the four screws (1) and


remove the pane / softkey unit.

Disconnect the plug connections (1)


and/or (2).

Turn the pane/softkey unit around.


Remove the screws (1) to (6).

11-52 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Pane / softkey unit 10,4’’ LCD

Turn the pane/softkey unit around


and remove the cover (1).

Turn the pane/softkey unit around


and remove the screws (1) and (2) on
the left and/or the right side.
Pull off the corresponding softkeys.

Reinstall it by following the same


steps in reverse order.
Make sure that the recess for the
softkey cables are in the right
position when you install the cover
(see arrow).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-53


15" LCD monitor Removal/Installation of Components FL

15" LCD monitor

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Remove the screws (1) and (2).

Disconnect the plugs (1) and (2) and


loosen the screws (3).

11-54 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Touch pane for 15“ LCD monitor

Pull the locking pins (1) and (2)


simultaneously outwards.
Remove the monitor upwards out of
the holder.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

Touch pane for 15“ LCD monitor

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").
• Remove the 15’’ LCD monitor (see section "15’’ LCD monitor").

Remove all cable binders.


Disconnect the two plug connections
(1) and (2).
Remove the 4 lower screws (3) to (6).

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-55


Touch pane for 15“ LCD monitor Removal/Installation of Components FL

Remove the 4 upper screws (1) to


(4).

Remove a screw on the left and the


right side of the operator panel.
The picture shows only the left screw
(1).
Remove the touch pane with holder.

Remove the screws (1) to (4).


Remove the Frame of touch pane (5)
from the touch pane holder (6).
Remove the touch pane.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-56 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Removal/Installation of Components FL Keyboard

Keyboard

PIN keyboard

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plug (1).


Remove the four screws (2) and pull
the keyboard down to remove it.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

EPP keyboard

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plug (1), remove the


four screws (2) and remove the
keyboard.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 11-57


Loudspeaker Removal/Installation of Components FL

Loudspeaker
The ProCash 2000 is equipped with three loudspeakers which are all removed
in the same way.

• Pull out the customer panel (see section "Opening the ProCash 2000 FL").

Disconnect the plugs (1), remove the


screws (2) and remove the
loudspeaker.
Reinstall it by following the same
steps in reverse order.

11-58 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Maintenance and Service
The information required for carrying out troubleshooting and maintenance on
the individual components can be found in the sections on the various
components in this manual.

When carrying out work on components and modules that carry an


electrical charge, this equipment must first be disconnected from the
mains. Due to construction, it is not enough to switch off the mains
switch on the power distributor. In addition, the safety plug must be
disconnected from the power distributor.
Additional equipment such as heaters or UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply) have separate power lines.
If the system is equipped with a UPS, you should note that the UPS
continues to supply power even after it has been disconnected from
the mains.
Systems with UPS: see also chapter "Smart UPS 700".

Test options
− All components of the system unit (PC) can be tested using the SDIAG
test program.
− As a rule, the integrated components can be checked with KDIAG or, in
individual cases, with PDIAG.
− It is also possible to carry out a check at user level with SOT (SOP Online
Test).
The current versions of the test programs are announced in Service bulletins.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 12-1


Preventive maintenance Maintenance and Service

Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance should be carried out once each year or after about
100,000 transactions.

Keyboard
Test the functioning of the keyboard and softkeys.

LCD monitor
Clean the display and protective screen on every call-out.

User guidance display


Check the functions.

UPS
See chapter "Smart UPS 700".

12-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Maintenance and Service Preventive maintenance

ID card readers (ID18, DIP, SWIPE)


The following cards should be used for maintenance and service purposes:

Test resources

Test card with magnetic track 01750013347


Hybrid test card (only ID18) 01750000093

Cleaning materials

Sensor cleaning card (only ID18) 01750000094


Cleaning brush for MM / CIM 86-sensor 01750012317
(only ID18)
Universal wet cleaning card (chip 10600018240 (Siemens Plus)
contacts and magnetic head)

Printers
Remove any paper scraps, paper dust and foreign material in the printing area.
Carry out an internal test.

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 12-3


Approved maintenance materials Maintenance and Service

Approved maintenance materials


Commercial name/ product name Code number Warehouse
number
Data medium cleaning solution, 250 ml NCA:32246.00.9.52 6386105
LUBRA metallic care fluid, pen with TDG:55002 2030522
needle, 12 ml
Maintenance fluid, 100100 ml — pump TPI=VC891 2030745
spray
Compressed air R134A, 500500 ml MSG:79507167 2031656
Touch-up pen, 9 ERGO Gray 611, 9ml PKY:LACKS- 2031441
ERGOGRAU-611
Touch-up pen, 9 Light Gray WN PKY:LACKS- 2031440
Standard, 9ml HELLGRAU-WN
Screw lacquer, 20 red, 20ml 39692.00.0.52 6410170
Screw lacquer, 20 black, 20ml 36701.00.3.52 6403310
Screw lacquer, 20 gray, 20ml 32018.00.6.52 6385222
UHU Plus permanent 300 (bonding 44270.00.4.52 6420028
agent, 8 g / hardener, 6 g)

Please note the manufacturer’s instructions on the packaging and


i information leaflet.
The product can be damaged or soiled if non-approved materials are
used or if the product is handled improperly.

12-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Index
Structure 8-2
A CCTV monitoring 2-8
Audio card Central cash-out controller (ZAC)
TT SOLO 01750022769 4-87 8-6
Audio Standard 2-3 COM assignment 2-10
Customer connector panel
B 3338700112 10-1

Block diagram D
System wiring diagram 2-2
Block diagrams Description of the device 1-5
Cash-out module 2-3 DIP push-in card reader
Portrait camera 2-3 ID24102114 5-11
Powersave feature 2-4 Dotcard-LVPL 2-17, 6-37
Dotcard-PL 6-61
C
Dotcard-PL adapter 2-17
Camera 01750010360 9-1 DU78
Card reader ID18 2-18, 5-1 DU78-V adapter 0175001284 4-
Cash-out module 75
Central cash-out controller 8-6, DU78-Va/b adapter
8-24 01750007738/-25516 4-81
Collecting tray and stacker 8-24
Description of cash path 8-31 E
Error codes 8-38
EICON C21 (01750011987) 4-35
Explanation of abbreviations 8-
29 EPP (Krone) 5-19
Functions of the various Ethernet 3C905B TX
modules 8-24 01750019090 4-71
Main features 8-21
Mode of operation of cash-out G
module SAT 2X00 and new
MDMS II 8-11 General power interrupt 1-4
Overview of sensors and Graphics card
electromechanical Dotcard-690 AGP 2-16
components 8-28

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual I-1


Index

Graphics card Dotcard-690 AGP Operator panel 01750018100 10-


(01750023889) 4-89 5
Overview of PC cards 2-13
I
P
ID18 card reader 5-1
Interface Dotcard - LVPL 6-37 PC
Overview 2-9
K SCENIC 6XX PCs 4-1
Pin assignment
Keyboards and keypads 2-19
Card reader ID18 5-6
L Power distributor 0323900000 3-5
Power distributor 0323900000 2-5
LPT assignment 2-9 Power interrupt 1-4

M Power supply 2-5


Power supply unit 00323501000
Maintenance and service 12-1 2-5
Manual (Structure) 1-5 Power supply unit 3235 3-1
Monitor Powersave Print 10-39
10.4’’ LCD SVGA Printer ND98 01750020687 7-1
(01750020552) 6-1
10.4’’ LCD VGA (01750020555) Printers 2-18
6-13 Push-in card reader ID24102114
12.1’’ LCD SVGA 5-11
(01750020892) 6-25
LCD 15’’ (01750020326) 6-47 R
Monitors 2-14
Receipt printer ND9C / ND9E 7-15
multiport card
Removal/Installation of
PCI 4-33
Components FL
10,4’’ LCD-Monitor without
N touchscreen 11-49
ND98 01750020687 7-1 15 11-54
AZM output transport 11-37
Customer connector panel 11-
O
46
Operating the flat displays 2-15 Device views 11-31
DIP push-in card reader 11-44

I-2 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Index

EDM 11-47 Pane / softkey unit for 10,4 11-


ID18 11-43 21
Journal printer ND98 11-42 PC 11-19
Keyboard 11-57 Power distributor 11-11
Loudspeakers 11-58 Power supply unit 11-11
MM converter 11-47 Powersave Print 11-10
Opening the device 11-34 Receipt printer ND9C 11-14
Operator panel 11-37 Special electronics 11-10
Pane / softkey unit for 10,4 11- SWIPE card reader 11-18
50 Touch pane for 15'' LCD monitor
PC 11-48 11-27
Power distributor 11-40 User guidance LEDs 11-20
Power supply unit 11-40
Powersave Print 11-39 S
Receipt printer ND9C 11-43
Special electronics 11-39 Safety precautions 1-2
SWIPE card reader 11-46 SCENIC PC system settings 2-11
Touch pane for 15’’ LCD monitor Smart UPS 700 10-21
11-55
User guidance LEDs 11-48 SOP button 2-8

Removal/Installation of Sound system Audio Standard 2-8


Components RL Special electronics III
10,4’’ LCD-Monitor without 01750003214 3-7
touchscreen 11-20 Special electronics module 2-7
15 11-25 Structure of the manual 1-5
AZM output transport 11-8
Capacitor (only ID18) 11-12, 11- SWIPE card reader ID24115214
41 5-15
Customer connector panel 11- System unit (PC) 2-9
18
Device views 11-1 T
DIP push-in card reader 11-16
ID 18 11-15 Technical data 1-7
Journal printer ND98 11-13 Token Ring AT 16/4 Plus C30
Keyboard 11-29 01750012715 4-61
Loudspeakers 11-30 Touchkit 15 6-69
MM converter 11-19
Opening the device 11-5
Operator panel 11-8

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual I-3


Index

U User guidance 4- / 6-digit 10-36

Uninterruptable power supply unit V


(UPS) 2-19
UPS 2-5 V.24 multiport card
16-channel 4-33
User guidance - signal assignment
2-7 V.24 PCI multiport card
8-channel 4-33

I-4 ProCash 2000 - Service Manual 01750030886 A


Telefax

We are interested in hearing your Wincor Nixdorf GmbH & Co. KG


comments on this manual. Any Handbuchredaktion
feedback you give us helps us 33094 Paderborn
improve our documentation and Germany
adapt it to your wishes and needs.
The quickest way to reach us is
by Fax.
+49 (0) 5251 8 - 2 62 09

Criticism, suggestions and corrections:

01750030886 A ProCash 2000 - Service Manual


Published by
Wincor Nixdorf GmbH & Co. KG
33094 Paderborn
Germany

Printed in Germany
Order no.: 01750030886 A

You might also like